Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Manual
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B-63945EN/03
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series
31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of
Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to
ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all
descriptions in this section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must
be undertaken only by a qualified technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become
familiar with the manuals provided by the machine tool builder and
FANUC.
Contents
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
s-2
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover
removed
(1) The user's clothing could become caught in the spindle or
other components, thus presenting a danger of injury. When
checking the operation, stand away from the machine to
ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the
spindle or other components.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/03
s-4
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the
power magnetics cabinet. If only the power to the CNC is turned
off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section. In
such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also
presenting a danger of electric shock.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier may retain voltages for a while, such that there is a
danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off.
Allow at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for
these residual voltages to dissipate.
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same
parameter and other settings as the old unit. (For details, refer to
the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine
itself, and present a danger of injury.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/03
WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a
parameter, close the machine cover. Never use the automatic
operation function immediately after such a modification. Instead,
confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the
single block function, feedrate override function, and machine
lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a
tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that
it operates normally, the machine may move unpredictably,
possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and presenting a
risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so
that those parameters usually need not be modified. When a
parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting
to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
s-6
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory,
because it must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters
even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be
lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.8 of
this manual.
s-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/03
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute
position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse
coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.10 of
this manual.
s-8
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate
and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an
insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
CAUTION
4. Liquid-crystal display
The liquid-crystal display was fabricated using a very precise
processing technology. However, please note in mind that it may
have dead and always-on pixels because of its characteristics and
this is not a failure.
s-9
B-63945EN/03 PREFACE
PREFACE
The manual consists of the following chapters:
Description of this manual
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are
related to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also
provided at the end of this chapter.
2. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 30i HARDWARE
3. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 300is/310is/320is
HARDWARE
4. STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Chapters 2 to 5 describes the configuration of the hardware, lists
the hardware units, and explains how to replace printed-circuit
boards.
6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including
programs, parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the
input/output procedures for conversational data.
7. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system
configuration, and the signals used by the PMC.
8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This chapter describes the embedded Ethernet.
9. DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust
the reference position return position.
10. AC SPINDLE
This chapter describes the spindle tuning screen.
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event
of certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot
be turned on or if manual operation cannot be performed.
Countermeasures to be applied in the event of alarms being
output are also described.
p-1
PREFACE B-63945EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
C. BOOT SYSTEM
D. MEMRY CARD SLOT
E. LED DISPLAY
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
G. MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
H. ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
J. MEMORY CLEAR
K. PANEL i BIOS SETUP
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to
the separate PARAMETER MANUAL.
Applicable models
This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be
applied to some products.For details, refer to the
DESCRIPTIONS manual (B-63942EN).
p-2
B-63945EN/03 PREFACE
Related manuals of
Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A
Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A
Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i
/300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 32i/320i /320is-A. This
manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL B-63944EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USER’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN *
PARAMETER MANUAL B-63950EN
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor PROGRAMMING B-63943EN-2
MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66264EN
C Language Executor OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63944EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
FL-net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64164EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i B-63874EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) B-63874EN-2
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) B-63874EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
p-3
PREFACE B-63945EN/03
p-4
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-2
WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION.................................................. s-3
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT ......................................................... s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............................................................ s-6
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE.... s-7
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION .................................................................. 1
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ............................................................ 2
1.1.1 Soft Key Structure ....................................................................................................2
1.1.2 General Screen Operations .......................................................................................3
1.1.3 Function Keys ..........................................................................................................5
1.1.4 Soft Keys ..................................................................................................................6
1.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN ....................................................... 16
1.2.1 Display Method ......................................................................................................16
1.2.2 Hardware Configuration Screen .............................................................................17
1.2.3 Software Configuration Screen ..............................................................................18
1.2.4 Outputting System Configuration Data ..................................................................21
1.3 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ............................................................................. 22
1.3.1 Displaying Diagnosis Screen..................................................................................22
1.3.2 Contents Displayed.................................................................................................22
1.4 CNC STATE DISPLAY ................................................................................ 41
1.5 OPERATING MONITOR.............................................................................. 45
1.5.1 Display Method ......................................................................................................45
1.5.2 Parameters ..............................................................................................................46
1.6 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY........................................................... 47
1.6.1 Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen .......................................................................48
1.6.2 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen .................................................................49
1.6.3 Tracing Data ...........................................................................................................60
1.6.4 Outputting Data ......................................................................................................62
1.7 COLOR SETTING SCREEN........................................................................ 68
1.7.1 Screen Display........................................................................................................68
1.7.2 Operations for Color Setting ..................................................................................69
1.7.3 Parameter................................................................................................................71
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
1.7.4 Notes.......................................................................................................................74
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE MONOCHROME LCD .... 75
1.9 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION ............................................. 76
1.9.1 Screen Display........................................................................................................77
1.9.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters......................................................................83
1.9.3 Parameters ..............................................................................................................85
1.9.4 Notes.......................................................................................................................87
1.10 SERVO GUIDE MATE................................................................................. 88
1.10.1 Wave Display .........................................................................................................89
1.10.1.1 Y-time graph...................................................................................................... 90
1.10.1.2 XY graph ......................................................................................................... 112
1.10.1.3 Circle graph ..................................................................................................... 124
1.10.1.4 Fourier graph ................................................................................................... 136
1.10.1.5 Bode graph....................................................................................................... 142
1.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN............................................... 152
1.11.1 Displaying the Maintenance Information Screen .................................................152
1.11.2 Operating the Maintenance Information Screen...................................................153
1.11.3 Half-Size Kana Input on the Maintenance Information Screen............................155
1.11.4 Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information Screen..........................155
1.11.5 Parameter..............................................................................................................156
c-2
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
c-4
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.15 REPLACING is SERIES CNC DISPLAY UNIT MAITENANCE PARTS ..... 370
4.15.1 Replacing the Main Board....................................................................................370
4.15.2 Replacing the Fuse ...............................................................................................372
4.15.3 Replacing the Battery ...........................................................................................372
4.15.4 Replacing Fan Motor............................................................................................373
4.15.5 Replacing the Touch Panel Protection Sheet........................................................373
4.15.6 Compensating the Touch Panel ............................................................................373
c-6
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
c-8
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
c-10
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX
A ALARM LIST ....................................................................................... 795
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)................................................................................... 796
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC) .................................................................................. 853
A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen ............................853
A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages .............................................................................856
A.2.3 Operation Errors ...................................................................................................859
A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages ....................................................................871
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) ............................................................. 875
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)........................................................ 883
B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS ...................................................... 885
C BOOT SYSTEM................................................................................... 886
C.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 887
C.1.1 Displaying the Power ON Sequence ....................................................................888
C.1.2 Starting the Boot System......................................................................................889
C.1.3 System Files and User Files .................................................................................889
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE .............. 891
C.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen.........................892
C.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen........................................................................894
C.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen ......................................................................897
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen ...........................................................................899
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen..........................................................................901
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen...................................................................904
C.2.7 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM .....................................................................................905
C.2.8 Cautions................................................................................................................905
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS ................................... 906
D MEMORY CARD SLOT....................................................................... 908
D.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 909
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) .................................................. 910
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION............................................................... 912
E LED DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 913
E.1 OVERIVIEW .............................................................................................. 914
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ..................................... 915
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING).......................................... 918
c-11
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
c-12
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
c-13
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
-1-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Operations and soft key display status for each function key are
described below:
-2-
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Procedure
1 By pressing a function key on the MDI panel, the chapter
selection soft keys that belong to the function are displayed.
Example 1)
Operation selection key
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen
of the chapter is displayed. If the soft key of a desired chapter
is not displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple
chapters.
Example 3)
Auxiliary menu
-3-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change.
From the button images, which state the soft keys are assuming can be
known.
Example)
• Chapter selection soft keys
-4-
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
-5-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
The chapter selection soft keys of each function are described below.
The horizontal four keys on the right-hand side are assigned to chapter
selection soft keys. When multiple pages are used for chapter
selection soft keys, [+] is displayed on the continuous menu key
(rightmost soft key). Press the continuous menu key to switch
between chapter selection soft keys.
NOTE
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that
are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the
option configuration.
If position indications are provided on the left half of the screen when
a key other than the function key is pressed, the left half of the
soft keys is displayed as follows at all times:
-6-
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
-7-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Program screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
-8-
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Offset/setting screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
TOOL (OPRT) +
Page 6 LIFE
WORK (OPRT) +
Page 7 SET ER
-9-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 10 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
System screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
- 11 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 12 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 13 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Message screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
- 14 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Graphic screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
- 15 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
After the system has started normally, you can find the types of
installed printed circuit boards and software types by displaying a
system configuration screen.
- 16 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Screen display
- Displayed information
The following explains the displayed information:
1. NAME
MAIN BOARD
• Displays information on the main board, and cards and
modules on the main board.
OPTION BOARD
• Displays information on the board installed in the option
slot.
DISPLAY
• Displays information on the display unit.
OTHERS
• Displays information on other components (such as an MDI
and a basic unit).
2. SLOT
• Displays the number of the slot in which the option board is
inserted.
- 17 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Screen display
- Displayed information
The following explains the displayed information:
SYSTEM : Software type
SERIES: Software series
EDITION: Software edition
- 18 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 19 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 20 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 21 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Causes when the machine does not travel in spite of giving a command
State of TH alarm
- 22 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#0 OFA Overflow alarm
#1 FBA Disconnection alarm
#2 DCA Discharge alarm
#3 HVA Overvoltage alarm
#4 HCA Abnormal current alarm
#5 OVC Over current alarm
#6 LV Insufficient voltage alarm
#7 OVL Overload alarm
- 23 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 201 ALD PCR EXP
#4 EXP
#7 ALD
ALD EXP Description
Overload alarm 0 - Motor overheat
1 - Amplifier overheat
Disconnection 1 0 Built-in Pulsecoder (hard)
alarm 1 1 Disconnection of separated type Pulsecoder (hard)
0 0 Disconnection of Pulsecoder (software)
#6 PCR The one-rotation signal of the position detector was caught before a
manual reference position return is performed. Since the manual
reference position return grid was established, a manual reference
position return is enabled.
NOTE
This bit is valid only when the operation of the
manual reference position return mode is started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
#0 SPH Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#1 CKA Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#2 BZA Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
#3 RCA Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
The speed was incorrectly counted.
#4 PHA Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is erroneous.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#5 BLA Battery voltage is low (warning)
#6 CSA Hardware of serial Pulsecoder is abnormal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 203 DTE CRC STB PRM
#4 PRM A parameter failure was detected on the digital servo side. See the
cause and measure described in diagnosis No. 352.
#5 STB Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#6 CRC Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#7 DTE Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
There is no response for communication.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#3 PMS Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial Pulsecoder C or feedback
cable.
#4 LDA Serial Pulsecoder LED is abnormal
#5 MCC Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
- 24 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
#0 SPH A soft phase data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#1 PMA A pulse error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#2 BZA The battery voltage for the separate Pulsecoder is zero.
#3 CMA A count error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#4 PHA A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
#5 BLA A low battery voltage occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#6 LDA An LED error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 OHA Overheat occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 206 DTE CRC STB
#5 STB A stop bit error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#6 CRC A CRC error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 DTE A data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 280 DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0 MOT The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 PLC The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3 PLS The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#4 DIR The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter
No. 2022 (the value is other than 111 or -111).
Machine position
- 25 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
Diagnosis 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] Machine unit
[Valid data range] 0 to ±99999999
NOTE
For the reference position setting without a dog,
the distance from the beginning of the reference
position setting without a dog to the first grid point
is assumed.
Reference counter
NOTE
1 Temperature information has the following error:
• 50°C to 160°C ±5°C
• 160°C to 180°C ±10°C
2 The temperature at which an overheat alarm is
issued has an error of up to 5°C.
- 26 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
#0 PR1 One of the following parameters was changed:
No.1803#7, No.1815#1, No.1820, No.1821, No.1822, No.1823,
No.1850, No.1874, No.1875, No.2022, No.2084, No.2085
#1 PR2 Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 was changed. Alternatively,
when bit 7 (SMA) of parameter No. 8302 was set to 1, APZ of the
axis to be synchronized together was set to 0.
#2 BZ1 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Inductosyn)
#3 BZ2 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Separate position detector)
#4 NOF The Inductosyn did not output offset data.
#5 ALP The zero point was set by MDI when the α pulse coder had not rotate
one or more turns.
#6 DTH An axis detach operation was performed by the controlled-axis detach
signal DTCH <G124> or by setting bit 7 (RMV) of parameter No.
0012.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
#0 AL1 An SV alarm (SV301 to SV305) was issued.
#1 AL2 Broken-wire alarm SV445 or SV447 was detected.
#2 AL3 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Serial Pulsecoder)
#3 AL4 Rotation count abnormality alarm RCAL was detected.
#4 GSG The status of broken-wire alarm ignore signal NDCAL (G202)
changed from 1 to 0.
#5 XBZ A battery voltage of 0 V or a count error was detected. (Separate
serial position detector)
#6 DUA The difference in error between the semi-closed loop and closed loop
became too large when the dual position feedback function was being
used.
Details of invalid servo parameter setting alarms (on the servo side)
Diagnosis 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm
Indicates information that can be used to identify the location
(parameter) and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting alarm
(servo alarm No. 417).
This diagnosis information is valid when the following conditions are
satisfied.
• Servo alarm No. 417 has occurred.
• Bit 4 of diagnosis No. 203 (PRM) = 1
See the following table for the displayed detail numbers and the
corresponding causes. For further detail information that could be
- 27 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
83 2019 Illegal learning control parameter → See Correct the parameter setting so that each
Supplementary. parameter is within a valid range.
A value specified as the number of velocity pulses Decrease the value specified as the number of
0233 2023
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. velocity pulses to within 13100.
Decrease the value specified as the number of
A value specified as the number of position pulses position pulses to within 13100. Use the
0243 2024
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. position feedback pulse conversion coefficient
(No. 2185).
0434 The internal value of the velocity loop integration Decrease the value specified in the velocity loop
2043
0435 gain has overflowed. integration gain parameter.
Use a function (No.2200#6) for changing the
0444 The internal value of the velocity loop proportional internal format of the velocity loop proportional
2044
0445 gain has overflowed. gain. Alternatively, decrease the setting of this
parameter.
0474 The internal value of the observer parameter
2047 Change the setting to: (-1) × (desired setting)/10
0475 (POA1) has overflowed.
0534 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2053
0535 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0544 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2054
0545 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0694
0695 The interval value of the velocity feed forward
2069 Decrease the velocity feed forward coefficient.
0696 coefficient has overflowed.
0699
0754 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2075
0755 overflowed. in it.
0764 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2076
0765 overflowed. in it.
Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
No positive value has been set for the flexible feed numerator.
gear numerator. Alternatively, satisfy the following condition: Feed
0843 2084
Alternatively, the following condition exists: Feed gear numerator ≤ denominator × 16
gear numerator > denominator × 16 (except for phase A-/B-specific stand-alone type
detector).
No positive value has been set as the flexible feed Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
0853 2085
gear denominator. denominator.
Decrease the machine velocity feedback
0884
The internal value of the machine velocity coefficient.
0885 2088
feedback coefficient has overflowed. Alternatively, use the damping control function,
0886
which has an equivalent effect.
The maximum allowable value for the machine
A value of 100 or greater was specified in the
velocity feedback coefficient for axes with a serial
0883 2088 machine velocity feedback coefficient for an axis
stand-alone type detector is 100. Decrease the
with a serial stand-alone type detector.
setting to within 100.
The internal value for suppressing N pulses has Decrease the setting of the parameter listed at
0996 2099
overflowed. the left.
The retract distance related to an abnormal load
1033 2103 differs between the L and M axes (if the same-axis Set the same value for both the L and M axes.
retract function is in use).
No value has been entered for the AMR
1123 2112 conversion coefficient parameter when a linear Specify the AMR conversion coefficient.
motor is in use.
- 28 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
2118 No dual position feedback conversion coefficient Set an AMR conversion coefficient.
1183 2078 is set.
2079
If the value specified as the number of velocity Decrease the value for the parameter listed at the
1284
2128 pulses is small, the internal value of the current left to within a range where no alarm will occur
1285
control parameter overflows. any longer.
If the value specified as the number of velocity Reset "a" to a smaller value when the setting of
1294
2129 pulses is large, the internal value of the current the parameter listed at the left is broken up into: a
1295
control parameter overflows. × 256 + b
Enlarge the AMR offset setting range
The setting of the linear motor AMR offset has
1393 2139 (N2270#1=1) to input a value within a range of
exceeded ±45.
±60.
1493 2149 A value greater than 6 is set in this parameter. A value not greater than 6 is permitted to be set
in this parameter. Correct the setting with a
value not greater than 6.
1503 2150 A value greater than or equal to 10 is set. The setting must be less than 10.
1793 2179 A negative value or a value greater than the Set a positive value smaller than the setting of
setting of parameter No. 1821 is set. parameter No. 1821.
1853 2185 A negative value or a value greater than the Set a positive value smaller than the setting of
setting of parameter No. 2023 is set. parameter No. 2023.
No positive value has been set in the reference Specify a positive value in the parameter listed at
8213 1821
counter capacity parameter. the left.
10016 The internal value of a parameter used to detect Do not use the runaway detection function
2200#0
10019 runaway has overflowed. (specify bit 0 = 1).
The scale reverse connection bit has been set up The scale reverse connection bit cannot be used
10053 2018#0
for a linear motor. for linear motors.
If you want to use this amplifier, reset the function
The amplifier in use does not support the HC bit listed at the left to 0.
10062 2209#4
alarm avoidance function. If you want to use the HC alarm avoidance
function, use an amplifier that supports it.
- 29 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 30 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Diagnosis 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
M (absolute position of the motor)-S (offset data)
λ (pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.
- 31 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 400 LNK
#7 LNK Communication with the spindle control side has been established.
NOTE
1 Temperature information has the following error:
• 50°C to 160°C ±5°C
• 160°C to 180°C ±10°C
2 The indicated temperature and the temperature
causing an overheat alarm have the following error:
• For lower than 160°C 5°C maximum
• For 160 to 180°C 10°C maximum
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
#0 CRE A CRC error occurred (warning).
#1 FRE A framing error occurred (warning).
#2 SNE The sender or receiver is not correct.
#3 CER An abnormality occurred during reception.
#4 CME No response was returned during automatic scanning.
#5 SCA A communication alarm was issued on the spindle amplifier side.
#7 SSA A system alarm was issued on the spindle amplifier side.
(The above conditions are major causes of alarm SP0749. These
conditions are caused mainly by noise, a broken wire, a momentary
failure of power, and so on.)
-1
Diagnosis 411 Spindle load meter indication [min ]
[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] min-1
- 32 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Difference in error amount between spindle and tapping axis during rigid
Diagnosis 452 tapping (momentary value)
[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] %
Difference in error amount between spindle and tapping axis during rigid
Diagnosis 453 tapping (maximum value)
[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] %
Diagnosis 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping (cumulative value)
[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
- 33 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Diagnosis 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
Diagnosis 458 Tapping axis distribution amount during rigid tapping (cumulative value)
[Data type] 2-word spindle
[Unit of data] Detection unit
Difference between the coordinate value of the drilling axis at which the
previous retraction operation started and the coordinate value of the drilling
Diagnosis 523 axis at which the current retraction operation starts (least input increment:
previous value minus current value)
- 34 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Semi-closed loop
error (No. 551)
Motor
Command + + +
Σ Kp Speed Machine
control
- + -
Servo amplifier
Ps
Conversion
coefficients
- 35 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 700 HOK HON
[Data type] Bit axis
The state of high-speed HRV current control is displayed.
#0 HON The motor is controlled in the high-speed HRV current control mode.
#1 HOK This bit is set to 1 when high-speed HRV current control is enabled.
High-speed HRV current control is enabled when the following
conditions are satisfied:
• Bit 0 (HR3) of parameter No. 2013 is set to 1.
• Bit 0 (HR4) of parameter No. 2014 is set to 1.
• Servo software, servo modules, and servo amplifiers suitable for
high-speed HRV current control are used.
• When a separate detector interface unit is used, the separate
detector interface unit is suitable for high-speed HRV current
control.
- 36 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
OVC level
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 1016 ANG ACM DT3 DT2 DT1 AEX
[Data type] Bit
The execution state of backup is indicated.
#0 AEX Automatic data backup is being performed.
#1 DT1 Data 1 was updated in the previous backup.
#2 DT2 Data 2 was updated in the previous backup.
#3 DT3 Data 3 was updated in the previous backup.
#6 ACM Automatic data backup was performed.
#7 ANG An error occurred in automatic data backup.
- 37 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 3019 EXP INP ABP
[Data type] Bit axis
If a detector battery low alarm is issued, the cause can be checked.
#3 ABP The battery of the A/B phase is low.
#4 INP The battery of the serial pulse coder (built-in position detector) is low.
#5 EXP The battery of the separate detector of serial type is low.
- 38 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Diagnosis data related to linear scale with absolute address reference marks
Diagnosis 3545 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Measurement point 1
Diagnosis 3546 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Measurement point 2
Diagnosis 3547 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Measurement point 3
Diagnosis 3548 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Measurement point 4
Diagnosis 3549 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Status display
Diagnosis 3550 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Scale value
- 39 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Diagnosis 3551 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Scale value (High)
Interpolation state
- 40 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
(1)
(5) : (10) :
(5) is displayed in the (10) is displayed at the
area for (3) and (4). position where (8) is
now displayed.
Fig. 1.3.2 (a)
(1) Current mode
MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
- 41 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 42 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Example 2)
When a parameter is entered
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
- 43 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 44 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter
can be displayed.
CAUTION
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to
200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio
of the current spindle speed to the maximum
spindle speed (100%). Although the speed meter
normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor,
it can also be used to indicate the speed of the
spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to
1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed
are set to parameter No. 3151 to 3153. If
parameters 3151 to 3153 are all zero, the load
meter of the basic axes are displayed.
- 45 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
1.5.2 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM
- 46 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 47 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- I/O signals
When displayed over the waveforms of servo and spindle data, up to
four I/O signals are plotted in the lower half of the screen.
In this case, the addresses of the plotted signals are indicated in the
second column on the left side.
When only signal data is displayed, up to nine signals are plotted in
the entire screen.
The addresses of the plotted signals are indicated in the first column
on the left side.
- 48 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Display
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [W.DGNS].
3 Pressing the soft key [PARAME] displays the waveform
diagnosis parameter screen.
- 49 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Editing
1 Follow the steps explained in "Display" to display the screen.
- 50 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Trace setting
- Trace condition
One of the following three trace conditions can be selected to start and
end tracing:
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed Event occurs
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed Event occurs
- 51 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Sampling cycle
Set the sampling cycle period for waveforms and the sampling cycle
for signals as follows:
Type Setting
Waveform Multiple of 2 ranging from 2 ms to 4096 ms
Signal Multiple of 2 ranging from 2 ms to 4096 ms
- Trace time
Set the period for tracing data.
The trace time specifies a period of time during which tracing is to be
performed for waveforms and signals. If the trace period is
insufficient, increase the sampling cycle, or decrease the measurement
items.
Approximately 32700 points of data can be traced. One point is used
for each sampling cycle of one channel. For signal measurement,
one channel is used regardless of the number of signals measured at
the same time.
When one channel of waveform is traced with a sampling cycle of 4
ms, tracing can be performed for 130 s.
When one channel of waveform is traced with a sampling cycle of
4096 ms, tracing can be performed for 37 hours.
- Delay time
When type 3 is selected as the trace condition, the end of tracing can
be delayed by a specified time after the occurrence of an event.
Valid data range: 0 to 65528 (in 8-ms increments)
Unit of data: ms
NOTE
If the input numeric value is not a multiple of 8 ms,
the value is rounded off to the nearest multiple of 8
ms.
- 52 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Trigger setting
- Trigger type
If you specify the occurrence of an event as a trigger when selecting a
trace condition in the trace setting of the waveform diagnosis
parameter screen (2: AFTER or 3: BEFORE is specified as the
trace condition), set the type of the trigger.
If 2 (AFTER) is selected as the trace condition, tracing starts when a
set trigger event occurs. If 3 (BEFORE) is selected as the trace
condition, tracing ends when the trigger event occurs.
- Alarm type
When the issuance of an alarm is specified as a trigger in the setting of
the trigger type (the trigger type is set to 1, 5, 6, or 7), set the type of
alarms used as a trigger as listed in the table below. When a
particular alarm type is not to be specified, use alarm signal AL as the
trigger.
- 53 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Alarm No.
If 6 (SV alarms) or 9 (SP alarms) is specified as the alarm type,
specify the target alarm number with an integer from 1 to 9999.
To specify all alarm numbers as the alarm target, set -1.
- Axis No.
If 6 (SV alarms) or 9 (SP alarms) is specified as the alarm type,
specify the target axis for the alarm with an axis number.
To set all axes as the alarm target, set -1.
NOTE
For multiaxis control, the axis number must be an
absolute axis number instead of a relative axis
number in each path.
- Signal address
When use of a signal as a trigger is specified for the trigger type (the
trigger type is set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7), enter the address of the signal
used as the trigger.
With a multi-path PMC, an address on a PMC path is set by
specifying the path number together with the address.
Example: 2:F0001.1
As shown in the above example, set a PMC path number plus a colon
(:) plus an address. With the standard PMC, which has just one path,
no path number needs to be specified.
NOTE
1 For PMC path numbers, refer to "Multi-Path PMC
Function" in "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL-A PMC
Programming Manual" (B-63983EN).
2 If the keyboard used does not have the ":" key, use
";" or "/" instead of ":".
- 54 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Waveform setting
NOTE
The servo torque and current command value are
represented by percentages to parameter No. 2086
(rated current).
- 55 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Type Setting
Servo positional deviation Controlled axis number (1 to 32)
Servo pulses after distribution
Servo torque
Servo pulses after
acceleration/deceleration
Actual servo speed
Servo current command value
Servo heat simulation data
Composite speed of all axes Path number (1 to 10)
Spindle speed Controlled spindle number (1 to 8)
Spindle load meter
Difference in spindle-converted
positional deviation
NOTE
For multiaxis control, the axis number must be an
absolute axis number instead of a relative axis
number in each path.
- Waveform color
Set the number of a color to be used for drawing the waveform as
listed below. The numbers represent associated system colors.
- 56 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Signal setting
- Signal setting
When the ON/OFF state of an input/output signal is to be traced, set
the address of the signal.
With a multi-path PMC, an address on a PMC path is set by
specifying the path number together with the address.
Example: 2:F0001.1
As shown in the above example, set a PMC path number plus a colon
(:) plus an address. With the standard PMC, which has just one path,
no path number needs to be specified.
NOTE
1 For PMC path numbers, refer to "Multi-Path PMC
Function" in "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL-A PMC
Programming Manual" (B-63983EN).
2 If the keyboard used does not have the ":" key, use
";" or "/" instead of ":".
3 For signal data, even when just one signal address
is input in an address 1 to 32, one channel is used.
4 When tracing is not performed, enter 0.
5 Up to 32 signals can be measured at the same time.
- 57 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Data type
1 When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed with the cursor positioned
at the trace data type in the trace waveform setting, the
[EXPLAIN] soft key appears.
2 Pressing the [EXPLAIN] soft key displays a list of trace data
types.
- 58 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Waveform color
1 When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed with the cursor positioned
at the waveform color in the trace waveform setting, the
[EXPLAIN] soft key appears.
2 Pressing the [EXPLAIN] soft key displays a list of waveform
colors
- 59 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Starting tracing
1 Display the waveform diagnosis graph screen.
2 Press the [TRACE] soft key to start tracing.
Canceling tracing
When the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed during tracing, tracing stops.
- 60 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
NOTE
Signal data cannot be moved.
- 61 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Specifying a format
When outputting data, you can select one of the two formats, which
are the FS16i compatible format (called the 16 compatible format
hereinafter) and the FS30i format (called the 30 format hereinafter).
If bit 0 (IOF) of parameter No. 10600 is set to 0, the 30 format is
selected; if bit 0 (IOF) of parameter No. 10600 is set to 1, the 16
compatible format is selected.
Output format
Traced data is input or output as a text file with the following format:
- Identifiers
Identifier word (T) Meaning
T0/T1 Header
T60 Servo positional deviation
T61 Servo pulses after distribution
T62 Servo torque
T63 Actual servo speed
T64 Servo current command value
T65 Servo heat simulation data
T68 Measurement item
T69 Date and time (start of measurement)
T70 Servo pulses after acceleration/deceleration
T75 Composite speed of all axes
T80 Spindle speed
T81 Spindle load meter
T82 Difference in spindle-converted positional deviation
T90 Measurement period (waveform)
T91 Measurement period (signal)
T92 Date and time (end of measurement)
T98 Signal data
(1) Header
30 format
T 1 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
16 compatible format
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
- 62 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
T 6 9 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
Year Month Day Hour Min Sec
T 9 2 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
Year Month Day Hour Min Sec
NOTE
The ending date and time is output only in the 30
format.
T 9 0 D * * * * ;
T 9 1 D * * * * ;
NOTE
The waveform sampling cycle and signal sampling
cycle are output only in the 30 format.
- 63 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
NOTE
Items P6 to P30 are output only in the 30 format.
- 64 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
T 6 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 1 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 2 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 3 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 4 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 5 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 7 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 7 5 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 1 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 2 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 9 8 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
NOTE
Signal data of waveform diagnosis data is output
after all waveform data is output.
- 65 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Sample file
T68P4D1
T68P10D1
T68P30DG0010.4,G0010.5,G0010.6 Measurement item/signal
- 66 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Outputting a file
1 Display the waveform diagnosis graph screen.
2 When the [(OPRT)] operation soft key is pressed, soft keys are
displayed in the following operation selection state:
6 When data output ends, or when the [CAN] soft key is pressed,
the initial operation selection state is restored.
NOTE
While data is being traced, data output is not
allowed.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10600 IOF
- 67 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
On the color setting screen, the colors of the VGA screen can be set.
- 68 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are
to be modified.
The current color palette values of the individual color elements
are displayed.
3 Select a color element to be modified, with the [RED], [GREEN],
or [BLUE] operation soft key.
Multiple color elements can be selected at a time.
Each of the [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys toggles
between selection and deselection each time the soft key is
pressed.
(The [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys, when not
displayed, can be displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key.)
4 By pressing the [BRIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key,
modify the brightness of the selected color element.
3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. The current color palette
values are stored in the selected area.
Pressing the [CAN] operation soft key or the leftmost key does
not store the current color palette values.
- 69 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. Color palette values are
called from the selected area for modification to the color
settings. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are
stored.
Pressing the [CANCEL] operation soft key or the leftmost key
does not call color palette values.
- 70 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.7.3 Parameter
- 71 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 72 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 73 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
1.7.4 Notes
(1) Immediately after the power is turned on, color 1 is used as the
screen color.
If no color palette values are stored in color 1, the FANUC
standard color is used for display.
(2) Do not modify the parameters of the standard color data by direct
MDI key input. When modifying the parameters of the RGB
value, be sure to perform a storage operation on the color setting
screen.
(3) If the screen display becomes invisible because an incorrect
value is input in an RGB value parameter, turn off the power
then turn on the power again while holding down the +
- 74 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Procedure
To adjust the brightness of the monochrome LCD, follow the
procedure below on the SETTING (HANDY) screen.
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [SETING] to display the SETTING DATA screen.
Press multiple times until the SETTING (HANDY)
screen appears.
NOTE
1 The new brightness of the screen is saved across
power-off.
2 This setting item appears only when the
monochrome LCD is connected.
- 75 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
When the I/O Link Option for the FANUC servo unit βi series (called
I/O Link βi below) is used for CNC additional axes (slaves), the
Power Mate CNC manager function can be used to display and set up
various types of data of these slaves on the CNC.
The Power Mate CNC manager function enables the following display
and setting operations:
Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
Parameter display and setting
Alarm display
Diagnosis data display
System configuration screen display
- 76 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Selecting a slave
When slaves are connected to multiple I/O Link channels, pressing
[NEXT CH.] or [PREV. CH.] displayed by pressing the [(OPRT)] soft
key changes the displayed channel.
In the upper section of the screen, the following information items are
displayed for the connected slaves (up to eight slaves):
- I/O Link group number (0 to 15)
- Alarm status
The cursor is positioned at the number of the slave for which to
display information (active slave). When multiple slaves are
connected, pressing the [NEXT SLAVE] or [PREV. SLAVE] changes
the active slave.
You can display the slave status and select a slave on any screen of the
Power Mate CNC manager function.
- 77 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Display method
Press soft key [ABS] or [MACHIN] to display the absolute coordinate
screen or machine coordinate screen, respectively.
- 78 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Parameter screen
The parameters required for the functions of the slave must be
specified in advance.
This screen displays only the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi series I/O Link
Option Maintenance Manual.
3 Enter a parameter number and press the [NO. SRH] soft key.
The search starts.
You can also select a desired parameter number by pressing
the cursor keys and page keys
- 79 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Setting a parameter
You can directly set an I/O Link βi parameter of the slave from
the CNC.
1 Select a desired parameter using either of the above
methods.
2 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
Alarm screen
If an alarm is issued for the slave, “ALARM” is displayed in the slave
status field in the upper section of the screen.
At this time, you can display the alarm screen to check the details of
the alarm.
Up to 40 alarm codes are displayed on the screen.
For details of the alarms, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi series
I/O Link Option Maintenance Manual.
- Display method
Press the [MSG] soft key. On the screen, only error codes are
displayed.
- 80 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Diagnosis screen
The diagnosis screen displays diagnosis information of the slave.
Diagnosis data is displayed in bit or integer (decimal) representation.
For details of diagnosis data, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi
series I/O Link Option Maintenance Manual.
- Display method
1 Press the continuous menu key .
2 Press soft key [DGNOS] to display the diagnosis screen.
3 Enter a diagnosis number and press the [NO. SRH] soft key.
The search starts.
You can also select a desired parameter number by pressing the
cursor keys and page keys and moving
the cursor.
- 81 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Display method
1 Press the continuous menu key .
2 Press the [SYSTEM] soft key to select the system configuration
screen.
- 82 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Outputting parameters
Parameters are output to the CNC memory or a memory card as a data
file in the program format. Set the first registration program number
in parameter No. 8760. For each slave, program with a
predetermined number is created.
When parameters are output to the CNC memory, a program with the
specified program number is created.
When parameters are output to a memory card, a file is created, of
which file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
The group number is the slave number displayed in the slave status
field in the upper section of the screen in reverse video.
When bit 3 (PMO) of parameter No. 0961 is set to 1, the numbers of
the parameters to be output can be set only with a group number.
3 Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
- 83 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
NOTE
1 Parameters can be saved in other than the MEM
mode or in the emergency stop status.
2 To save parameters in a memory card, if a file with
the same name is found in the memory card, the
parameters cannot be saved. Delete the file from
the memory card or change the file name by setting
parameter No. 8760.
To save parameters in a program area, save
operation is performed according to the setting of
bit 2 (REP) of parameter No. 3201.
Inputting parameters
A data file of parameters output to the CNC memory or a memory
card as a program is input to the slave determined by the program
number. The program number and memory device are determined
as described in “Outputting parameters.”
4 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
NOTE
1 Parameters can be input in other than the MEM
mode or in the emergency stop status.
2 For multipath control, parameters can be input and
output only using the Power Mate CNC manager
screen for path 1. They can only be input from
and output to the CNC memory for path 1.
- 84 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.9.3 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PPE PMN MD2 MD1
#4 PPE Setting slave parameters using the Power Mate CNC manager:
0: Can always be performed regardless of the setting of PWE.
1: Follows the setting of PWE.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0961 PMO
- 85 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Warning
If an alarm is issued for the Power Mate CNC manager, a warning
message is displayed.
Message Description
DATA ERROR An attempt was made to execute [PUNCH] (NC → β) for a program
not found in the program area.
WRITE PROTECTED An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) for a program
area when the memory protection signal (KEY) is off.
EDIT REJECTED An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the program
area already contained a program with the same name as that to be
created by executing [READ] (β → NC).
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the number
of the program to be created by executing [READ] (β → NC) was
selected.
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when bit 0 (TVC)
of CNC parameter No. 0000 was set to 1. (Parameters Nos. 0000 to
0019 are output, but parameter No. 0020 and subsequent parameters
are not output.)
An attempt was made to execute [PUNCH] (NC → β) when a memory
card did not contain any program for which [PUNCH] (NC → β) could
be executed.
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) for a protected
memory card.
NO MORE SPACE An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the program
area did not have enough unused space.
FORMAT ERROR Data other than digits, signs, CAN, and INPUT was entered as the
setting of a parameter.
TOO MANY FIGURES Data consisting of 9 or more digits was entered for a bit-type
parameter.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The setting exceeds the valid data range.
- 86 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.9.4 Notes
- 87 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
The servo guide mate enables various types of data related to the servo
motor and spindle motor to be displayed on the screen in the form of
graphs. This allows you to readily measure the machine precision,
thereby making it easy to grasp changes in precision resulting from
the aging process, an earthquake, or collision of the machine.
Overview
Set up as outlined in Fig. 12.5(a), the servo guide mate displays
graphs representing the feedback data related to the servo motor and
spindle motor that are controlled through the execution of the program.
It features such functions as drawing graphs representing
chronological changes in data and the motor path, as well as
displaying an enlarged view of error associated with the circular
operation.
CNC
G r a p h d is p la y
Feedback
d a ta
P a r a m e te r s e ttin g
D a ta b u f f e r P r o g r a m e x e c u tio n
F e e d a x is
S e rv o m o to r
S p in d le m o to r
S p in d le
Sensor
- 88 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
CH1 Draw1
Data
CH2 Draw2 Screen
acquisition display
CH3 Draw3
CH4 Draw4
Measurements of both the servo motor and spindle motor can be made
for up to four channels simultaneously. Also, data can be measured
at up to 10000 points per measurement item.
The following five drawing modes are available.
1 Y-time graph
This mode displays wave data along the time axis, as by an
oscilloscope.
2 XY graph
This mode provides a 2-dimensional path display using 2-axis
data.
3 Circle graph
This mode displays an enlarged view of the path deviation from
the specified circle arising during circular cutting.
4 Fourier graph
This mode displays the frequency spectrum by performing digital
Fourier conversion for the range of data displayed by the Y-time
graph.
5 Bode graph
This mode displays a Bode diagram in the form of single
logarithm graph for the horizontal axis.
- 89 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Note
- Axis number
NOTE
For multiaxis control, the axis number must be an
absolute axis number instead of a relative axis
number in each path.
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO
GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
3 Click the [SERVO GUIDE MATE] soft key.
4 Click the [Y-TIME] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 90 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
8 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
9 Enter data and then press the key.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
12 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 91 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
key.
17 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
18 Enter data and the press the key.
19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 until you set all the parameters.
20 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
- 92 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
22 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
23 Enter data and the press the key.
24 Repeat steps 22 and 23 until you set all the parameters.
25 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
26 Click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key.
27 Click the [START] soft key.
28 Start the automatic or manual operation.
29 When the measurement is completed, the wave display screen is
displayed as shown below.
- 93 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
key.
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 94 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 95 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 96 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Performing measurement
When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key, you can perform
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.
- 97 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
5 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
6 Enter data and the press the key.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you set all the parameters.
8 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 98 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform
measurement. Change the operation/graph settings and scale
settings according to the new channel settings.
Explanation
- Setting the data-in screen
• Measurement data points
Enter a numerical value between 1 and 10000. This setting
represents the number of data points to be measured. The data
measurement time is calculated by multiplying the data points by
the sampling cycle. If different sampling cycles are set for the
servo axis and spindle axis, the data points for the shorter
sampling cycle apply. The data points for the longer sampling
cycle is decreased according to the sampling cycle ratio.
• Trigger path and sequential number
Enter numerical values - path number and sequential number -
that specify when to trigger measurement. Numerical values
that can be specified as path numbers are sequential, starting at
Path 1, with the maximum value being the number of paths that
are set to the CNC. The range of sequential numbers is from 0
to 99999. If 0 is specified as the sequential number,
measurement starts immediately after you click the
[MEASUREMENT] soft key and then the [START] soft key.
• Sampling cycle (servo and spindle)
Enter numerical values that specify the sampling cycles for the
servo axis and spindle axis separately. The specifiable values
are listed in Table 1.10.1.1(a), Sampling cycles.
- 99 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Auto scaling
Enter a numerical value that specifies whether to perform auto
scaling each time a measurement is made. The specifiable
values are 1 (do not perform), 2 (perform only once), and 3
(perform each time). When auto scaling is enabled, the wave
scale is changed so that the entire wave can be displayed within
the display range of the graph. Therefore, when you want to
monitor changes in the wave size, it is better to fix the scale,
rather than using the auto scaling function.
• Synchronization mode selection
The specifiable values are 1 (do not select) and 2 (select).
This function may be useful in cases where data is not
synchronized in terms of time due to different sampling cycles
when interpolation between servo axis and spindle axis is
performed through Cs contour control or other means. (In some
cases, the function may not produce any effect.)
• Date and time
The date and time when data is measured are displayed. (This
is a read-only item.)
- 100 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 101 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Unit
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(d),
Measurement data units. However, as shown in Table
1.10.1.1(e), Corresponding measurement data units, you cannot
specify any unit other than that corresponding to the type of
measurement data. Under normal circumstances, the
automatically set values do not need to be changed. When
performing polar coordinate conversion or other operation that
requires information about the actual position of the rotation axis,
deg needs to be selected as the unit.
- 102 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 103 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Conversion coefficient
Set the weight of the data selected for each channel type
(numerator = physical amount). For POSF and other
position-related data, specify the amount of travel per pulse.
For VCMD and SPEED, specify 3750. For TCMD, specify the
maximum current value of the amplifier in use.
• Conversion base
Set the weight of the data selected for each channel type
(denominator = raw data unit). Under normal circumstances,
use the value that is automatically set when the type is selected.
Usually, the system automatically sets 1 for POSF and other
position-related data, 32768 for VCMD and SPEED, and 7282
for TCMD.
• Origin value
Specify the value that is to be set as the initial value for each
channel when you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key and
then the [ORIGIN] soft key.
• Extended address
Under normal circumstances, this item is unspecifiable and not
used. (This is a read-only item.)
• Shift
Under normal circumstances, this item is unspecifiable and not
used. (A value may be set automatically when the type is
selected.)
- 104 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 105 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Input 1
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.1(g), Y-time graph conditions cannot be specified in input
1.
- 106 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
• Input 2
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. Note
that, when Bit is specified as the operation, values are
sequentially set, with bit position 0 being 10. In this case, the
maximum value is 25, which indicates bit position 15. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.1(g), Y-time graph conditions cannot be specified in input
2.
• Display unit
Specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(h), Display
units. The conditions for specifying these display units are as
shown in Table 1.10.1.1(i), Y-time graph display units.
- 107 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 108 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
• Coordinate conversion
Specifiable values are 1 (Normal; no coordinate conversion), 2
(Polar; coordinate conversion for polar coordinate interpolation),
and 3 (Angular; coordinate conversion for angular axis control).
The conditions for the specifiable coordinate conversion types
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(j), Corresponding Y-time graph
coordinate conversion types. Note that no conditions are
imposed for specifying Normal (no coordinate conversion).
• Inclination
Specify the inclination in degrees. The specified value is
effective only when Angular (coordinate conversion for angular
axis control) is specified as the coordinate conversion type.
- 109 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Limitation
- Data update cycle
Position-related data is updated at intervals of 1 ms, and power-related
data is updated at the current cycle. Therefore, even if you specify a
sampling cycle that is shorter than the data update cycle, the displayed
data remains unchanged during the present data update cycle.
The following limitations are imposed on the servo axis and spindle
axis.
Number of channels that can be acquired per servo DSP
• Up to four channels can be acquired when the sampling cycle is 1
ms or longer, 500 µs, or 250 µs.
• Up to two channels can be acquired when the sampling cycle is
125 µs.
• Only one channel can be acquired when the sampling cycle is
62.25 µs.
- 110 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 111 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
1.10.1.2 XY graph
This graph provides a 2-dimensional path display of measurement data
by using 2-axis data.
Up to two draws can be displayed at a time.
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO
GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
3 Click the [SERVO GUIDE MATE] soft key.
4 Click the [XY] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 112 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
8 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
9 Enter data and the press the key.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
12 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 113 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
key.
17 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
18 Enter data and the press the key.
19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 until you set all the parameters.
20 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
- 114 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
22 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
23 Enter data and the press the key.
24 Repeat steps 22 and 23 until you set all the parameters.
25 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
26 Click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key.
27 Click the [START] soft key.
28 Start the automatic or manual operation.
29 When the measurement is completed, the wave display screen is
displayed as shown below.
- 115 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
key.
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 116 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 117 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 118 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Performing measurement
When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key, you can perform
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.
- 119 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
5 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
6 Enter data and the press the key.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you set all the parameters.
8 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 120 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform
measurement. Change the operation/graph settings and scale
settings according to the new channel settings.
Explanation
- Setting the data-in screen
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
setting of the data-in screen.
- 121 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Input 1
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.2(b), XY graph conditions cannot be specified in input 1.
• Input 2
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.2(b), XY graph conditions cannot be specified in input 2.
• Display unit
The specifiable value is 4 (mm) only.
- 122 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
• Coordinate conversion
Specifiable values are 1 (Normal; no coordinate conversion), 2
(Polar; coordinate conversion for polar coordinate interpolation),
and 3 (Angular; coordinate conversion for angular axis control).
The conditions for the specifiable coordinate conversion types
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.2(c), Corresponding XY graph
coordinate conversion types.
• Inclination
Specify the inclination in degrees. The specified value is
effective only when Angular (coordinate conversion for angular
axis control) is specified as the coordinate conversion type.
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
- 123 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO
GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
3 Click the [SERVO GUIDE MATE] soft key.
4 Click the [CIRCLE] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 124 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
8 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
9 Enter data and the press the key.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
12 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 125 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
17 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
18 Enter data and the press the key.
19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 until you set all the parameters.
20 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
21 Click the [SCALE SET] soft key.
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown below.
- 126 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
22 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
23 Enter data and the press the key.
24 Repeat steps 22 and 23 until you set all the parameters.
25 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
26 Click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key.
27 Click the [START] soft key.
28 Start the automatic or manual operation.
29 When the measurement is completed, the wave display screen is
displayed as shown below.
- 127 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
5 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
Based on the new operation and graph settings, the wave display
screen is displayed as shown below.
- 128 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
5 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
Based on the new scale settings, the wave display screen is
displayed as shown below.
- 129 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Performing measurement
When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key, you can perform
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.
- 130 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
5 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 131 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
10 Enter data and the press the key.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until you set all the parameters.
12 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 132 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform
measurement. Change the operation/graph settings and scale
settings according to the new channel settings.
Explanation
- Setting the data-in screen
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
setting of the data-in screen.
- 133 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
• Input 1
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.3(b), Circle graph conditions cannot be specified in input
1.
• Input 2
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.3(b) Circle graph conditions cannot be specified in input
2.
• Display unit
The specifiable value is 4 (mm) only.
• Coordinate conversion
Specifiable values are 1 (Normal; no coordinate conversion), 2
(Polar; coordinate conversion for polar coordinate interpolation),
and 3 (Angular; coordinate conversion for angular axis control).
The conditions for the specifiable coordinate conversion types
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.3(c), Corresponding Circle graph
coordinate conversion types.
• Inclination
Specify the inclination in degrees. The specified value is
effective only when Angular (coordinate conversion for angular
axis control) is specified as the coordinate conversion type.
- 134 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
• Division
Set the scale of the circle display.
• Zoom
Set the zoom percentage when expanding the display in the
direction of the center angle at the quadrant change point
(direction change point for each axis). This is effective for
getting a detailed view of quadrant protrusions. Under normal
circumstances, set this value to 1.0.
- Performing measurement
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
performing measurement.
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
- 135 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Display the Y-time graph according to the relevant procedure.
2 Click the [FOURIER] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 136 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
4 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
5 Enter data and the press the key.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you set all the parameters.
7 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
8 Click the [SCALE SET] soft key.
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown below.
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
10 Enter data and the press the key.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until you set all the parameters.
- 137 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 138 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you set all the parameters.
- 139 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 140 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Explanation
- Setting the operation and graph setting screen
The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify up to four
graph settings per draw.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.4(a), Fourier
graph operations.
An operation cannot be specified if it does not meet the graph
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.4(b), Fourier graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.4 (a) Fourier graph operations
Input Operation
Description
value name
1 N/A Not displayed.
Displays the frequency spectrum by performing
31 Fourier
digital Fourier conversion.
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
- 141 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO
GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
3 Click the [SERVO GUIDE MATE] soft key.
4 Click the [BODE] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
- 142 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
8 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
9 Enter data and the press the key.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
12 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 143 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
17 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
18 Enter data and the press the key.
19 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
20 Click the [SCALE SET] soft key.
The scale setting screen is displayed as shown below.
21 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 144 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 145 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
3 Enter data and the press the key.
4 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
Based on the new operation and graph settings, the wave display
screen is displayed as shown below.
2 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 146 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 147 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- Performing measurement
When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key, you can perform
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.
- 148 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
5 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
6 Enter data and the press the key.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
9 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
- 149 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform
measurement. Change the operation/graph settings and scale
settings according to the new channel settings.
Explanation
- Setting the data-in screen
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
setting the data-in screen.
- 150 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Performing measurement
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
performing measurement.
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
- 151 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
Column
Line
- 152 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Status display
<1> Kana/alphabetic
KN: Half-size kana input mode.
ABC: English input mode
<2> OVER / INSERT
OVER: Overwrite mode
INSERT: Insert input mode.
<3> EDIT / READ
EDIT: Editing allowed
READ: Editing inhibited
<4> Number of empty character spaces
Number of empty character spaces as half-size characters
<5> Current cursor line
Position of the line on which the cursor is currently located.
<6> Current cursor column
Position of the column at which the cursor is currently located.
NOTE
The numbers of lines and columns that can be
displayed by each LCD are:
• 10.4” display unit: 37 characters × 12 lines
• 7.2”/8.4” display unit: 38 characters × 11 lines
• 15” display unit: 38 characters × 19 lines
- 153 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
- 154 -
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- 155 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
1.11.5 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3116 MDC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 MIF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8901 MEN
- 156 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
2.1 STRUCTURE...........................................................................158
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE...............................................159
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ....................................160
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD CONNECTORS AND CARDS.................................163
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS .........174
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD.........................................193
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT ............................199
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY ........................................................201
2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS .................................................206
2.10 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT ..................................209
- 157 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
2.1 STRUCTURE
Servo amplifier
I/O Link
- 158 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2-axis to 24-axis control
- Spindle interface
- LCD/MDI interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High-speed DI
- RS-232C
- Memory card interface
- PC function
(300is/310is/320is)
Fast Data Server board
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.
- 159 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Main board
24V-IN(CPD16A) 24 VDC power supply
MDI UNIT
MDI(CA55) CK27
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
3rd and 4th
serial PSM
spindles
Position coder
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
FSSB(COP10A-2) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
ETHERNET(CD38A Ethernet
/CD38S)
- 160 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
SPDL(JA41L)
7th spindle
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
- 161 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
PROFI(CN2) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)
DeviceNet slave
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)
FL-net board
- 162 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 163 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Connector unit
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)
CK21A CDP16A
JD36A JD51A
CA79A
JGM CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK21A CPD16A
JD36A JD51A
- 164 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 165 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Connector
Connector
Connector
- 166 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 167 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Connector Connector
DIMM
module
socket
- 168 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
- 169 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- LED display
Rear of unit
ALM2
ALM3
LOW
COM
LINK
- 170 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 171 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
TMBB(Short)
Ensure that this is short-circuited.
Main board
Name Specification
Inverter P.C.B. For 7.2” color LCD A20B-8100-0961
For 8.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0963
For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
Connector unit A15L-0001-0091
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
Main board
CPD12(when A20B-8101-002x)
- 172 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Battery
Rear of unit
- 173 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Battery
Rear of unit
CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
module
COP
CD38S
JD54 JD51A
CPD16A
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or CP95
CA55
(FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
CPD12
module
CK20A
CK21A JD54 JD51A
CDP16A
- 174 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 175 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card (3) Display control card
コネクタ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit
- 176 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Connector
- 177 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card (3) Display control card
コネクタ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit
- 178 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 179 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
コネクタ
Connector
- 180 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
コネクタ
Connector
- 181 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Block diagram
(1) For main boards B1 and B2 for 15” display units
Main board
Display control card CPU card
Display
DRAM
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
- 182 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Main board
Display control card CPU card
Display
DRAM
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
Ethernet
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display unit
RS232C
- 183 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- LED display
(1) For main boards B1 and B2 for 15” display units
Rear view
Unit of rear
DNV4
(green)
(b) GUI status
DNV3
(d) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 184 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(green)
(b) GUI status
DNV3
(d) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 185 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 186 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 187 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Main board
Power
supply unit
Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMSF1(Short)
Ensure that this is left open. Ensure that this is short-circuited.
- 188 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
Main board
CA87A
CPD12(when A20B-8101-002x)
15.0-inch Inverter
LCD unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Conversion cable
- 189 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power supply
COP module
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of the
two cables from the inverter.
- 190 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 191 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 192 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
- 193 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 194 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
2.5.5 I/O
- 195 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 196 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
Replacement procedure
1 Remove the LCD-mounted type control unit, referencing Section
5.13, “MOUNTING AND REMOVING LCD AND MDI
UNITS.”
2 Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan and battery cables need not be detached.
- 197 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Claw
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK20A
CK21A
- 198 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Rear of unit
Fuse
- 199 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power supply
COP module
Fuse
- 200 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control
unit. The power to the SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery
mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The above data is not
lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup battery is
mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can maintain the
contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
In general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no
longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are
lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.
- 201 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Connector
Battery
case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Battery
case
Connector
Lithium battery
A02B-0236-K102
Battery cable
- 202 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may
result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery
only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30
minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the specified period.
Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30
minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to
the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be
restored easily.
For the method of operation, refer to Section 4.9 or
Appendix D.
- 203 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
When replacing the alkaline dry cells while the
power is off, use the same procedure as that for
lithium battery replacement described above.
Cover
Connection terminal
on the rear
Mounting hole × 4
Battery case
- 204 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
When replacing the lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
- Method of connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected.
The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with
external batteries in the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) according to
the battery replacement procedure described above.
Connector
CAUTION
1 Install the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in a
location where the batteries can be replaced even
when the power to the control unit is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the
control unit by means of a simple lock system. To
prevent the connector from being disconnected
due to the weight of the cable or tension within the
cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the
connector.
- 205 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
When a reduction in the speed of the fan motor is detected, the FAN
warning message blinks on the LCD screen.
When a failure such as stop of the fan motor is detected, an overheat
alarm or system alarm is issued and the system stops operating.
Therefore, as soon as the FAN warning appears, replace the fan motor.
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan
motor, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
- 206 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
Replacement procedure
Fig. a
(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case
- 207 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
(2) Fan
- 208 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
- 209 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Replacement procedure
1 Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan and battery cables need not be detached.
Claw
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK20A
CK21A
- 210 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
3 Remove the two screws under the main board and remove the
metal plate to which the main board is attached from the
escutcheon section.
Connector
Connector
Connector
4 Remove the three screws at the left on the surface of the LCD
unit, open the cover to expose the backlight, replace the cable of
the inverter with a new one.
Con
nect
LCD unit
display surface
Backlight
- 211 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 212 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- 213 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
For the 300is/310is/320is, the following connection is required, in addition to the connection common to the
30i/300is/31is/310is/32i/310is.
300is/310is/320is
control unit
24V-IN(CPD16A)
SPDL (JA41)
I/O LINK(JD51A) The functions and connections of the
HDI(JA40) connectors on the left are the same as for the
MDI(CA55) Series 30i. See Section 2.3, “TOTAL
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.”
FSSB(COP10A-1)
FSSB(COP10A-2)
R232-1/S.SPDL(JD56A)
{ RS-232-C I/O device
Serial spindle
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54)
USB printer
USB keyboard
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
Ethernet backbone cable
See Section 2.3, "TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS" for connection other than the above.
- 214 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- Specification
Item Specification
A20B-8101-0020
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (For 10.4"LCD) or
A20B-8101-0028
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0023
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0021
A20B-8101-0024
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (For 10.4"LCD) or
A20B-8101-0029
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0025
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (For 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0370
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0373
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0371
310is-A, 320is-A main board G4 (For 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0374
310is-A, 320is-A main board G6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0377
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0375
- 215 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Battery
Rear view
Rear of unit
CA76
CA55 (FUSE)
JA40 JA41 Power
supply unit
COP
CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
or
CPD16A
CA113
CA98
JGM CA87A CN79A
CA88A
Main board
CD38S
CK20A
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A
or
CA113 CPD16A
- 216 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- 217 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card (3) Display control card
コネクタ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit
- 218 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- 219 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
コネクタ
Connector
GUI card
(3) Compact flash card
Connector
GUI card
(connector side)
- 220 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Connectorコネクタ
- 221 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Block diagram
(1) For main boards C1 to C6
Main board
Display control card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
- 222 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Main board
Display control card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
USB 1,2ch control
Ethernet control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display unit
RS232C
- 223 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- LED display
(1) For main boards C1 to C6
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(green)
(2) GUI status
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 224 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(green)
(2) GUI status
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 225 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system
alarm occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
CNC alarm
No. LED Status
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.
An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main board.
4 The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or the FSSB may
be broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the DIMM
module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may have
dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6
The cause may be noise or a power supply module failure.
: On : Off
(2) Changes in status LED (GUI side status: Green LED) indication
at power-on time
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3 2 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the system
1
was started up successfully and is running normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and GUI card is being
initialized.
3
If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication, the
CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be faulty.
Start-up on the GUI card side is being awaited.
4 If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication, the
GUI card or main board may be faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the GUI card, or a RAM
error occurred in the interface between the CPU card and GUI
5
card. If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication,
the CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be faulty.
: On : Off
- 226 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
(4) GUI POWER (green LED) indicates that power is supplied to the
GUI card (at the time of back-up operation as well).
Main board
Power
supply unit
Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMSF1(Short)
Ensure that this is left open. Ensure that this is short-circuited.
- 227 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
- 228 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
CPD12
Conversion cable
- 229 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
- 230 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
- 231 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Parent
Name Ordering code Remarks
specification
Main board C1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0020 ID=00304
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0303-H105
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C3 (300is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=00307
C2 (300is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=00305
C1 (310is-A5, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0020 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0306-H105
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C3 (310is-A5, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0306-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=00307
C2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0306-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=00305
C4 (310is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0024 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0307-H105
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C6 (310is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0307-H106 A20B-8101-0027 ID=00313
C5 (310is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0307-H107 A20B-8101-0025 ID=00311
C4 (320is-A , for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0024 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0308-H105
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C6 (320is-A , for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0308-H106 A20B-8101-0027 ID=00313
C5 (320is-A , for 15"LCD) A02B-0308-H107 A20B-8101-0025 ID=00311
G1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0303-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
G3 (300is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
- 232 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Parent
Name Ordering code Remarks
specification
Main board G2 (300is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
G1 (310is-A5, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0306-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
G3 (310is-A5, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0306-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
G2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0306-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
G4 (310is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0307-H103 A20B-8101-0374 ID=0031C
G6 (310is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0307-H104 A20B-8101-0377 ID=0031F
G5 (310is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0307-H108 A20B-8101-0375 ID=0031D
G4 (320is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0308-H103 A20B-8101-0374 ID=0031C
G6 (320is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0308-H104 A20B-8101-0377 ID=0031F
G5 (320is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0308-H108 A20B-8101-0375 ID=0031D
GUI card For main 10.4” /15"LCD and A02B-0303-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
board C1 to memory ( 64MB)
C6 10.4” /15"LCD and A02B-0303-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
memory (128MB)
12.1” LCD and A02B-0303-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X0
memory (64MB)
12.1"LCD and A02B-0303-H143 A20B-3300-0423 ID=0001X0
memory (128MB)
For main Memory (128MB) A02B-0303-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
board G1 to ID=0110XX
Memory (256MB) A02B-0303-H146 A20B-3300-0552
G6
Power supply unit A02B-0303-H110 A20B-8101-0010
Inverter printed For 10.4"LCD - A20B-8100-0962
circuit board For 12,1"LCD - A14L-0143-0003
For 15"LCD - A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter For 12.1”/15”LCD - A20B-8100-0969
Backup unit printed circuit board - A20B-2100-0820
Back panel No slot - A20B-2003-0600 ID=01
1 slot - A20B-2003-0810 ID=00
2 slots - A20B-2003-0610 ID=10
- 233 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Parent
Name Ordering code Remarks
specification
LCD unit For main board C1 10.4"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H125 A02B-0303-D505 ID=1111
to C6 With touch panel A02B-0303-H127 A02B-0303-D506 Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D541 ID=1111
12.1"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H170 A02B-0303-D509 ID=1110
With touch panel A02B-0303-H171 A02B-0303-D534 H171 only
With touch panel A02B-0303-H172 A02B-0303-D510 Without soft
key
15"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H225 A02B-0303-D515 ID=1101
Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D525 ID=1101
With touch panel A02B-0303-H227 A02B-0303-D516 ID=1101
Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D526 ID=1101
For main board G1 10.4"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H121 A02B-0303-D563 ID=1111
to G6 With touch panel A02B-0303-H129 A02B-0303-D541
12.1"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H173 A02B-0303-D557 ID=1110
With touch panel A02B-0303-H174 A02B-0303-D544 H174 only
With touch panel A02B-0303-H175 A02B-0303-D545 Without soft
key
15"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H228 A02B-0303-D558 ID=1101
With touch panel A02B-0303-H229 A02B-0303-D551
Case unit No slot 300is-A A02B-0303-B600 A02B-0303-C500
A02B-0303-B620
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B600
A02B-0306-B620
310is-A A02B-0307-B600
A02B-0307-B620
320is-A A02B-0308-B600
A02B-0308-B620
1 slot 300is-A A02B-0303-B601 A02B-0303-C501
A02B-0303-B621
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B601
A02B-0306-B621
310is-A A02B-0307-B601
A02B-0307-B621
320is-A A02B-0308-B601
A02B-0308-B621
2 slots 300is-A A02B-0303-B602 A02B-0303-C502
A02B-0303-B622
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B602
A02B-0306-B622
310is-A A02B-0307-B602
A02B-0307-B622
320is-A A02B-0308-B602
A02B-0308-B622
The case unit includes the case, backpanel, fan, and battery.
- 234 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
3.5.3 Others
Parent
Name Ordering code Remarks
specification
Compact flash card 32MB A02B-0303-H151 A87L-0001-0173#032MBA Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC Proper operation: 32MB
64MB A02B-0303-H152 A87L-0001-0173#064MB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC Proper operation: 64MB
128MB A02B-0303-H153 A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
256MB A02B-0303-H154 A87L-0001-0173#256MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#256MBC
512MB A02B-0303-H155 A87L-0001-0173#512MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#512MBC
1GB A02B-0303-H156 A87L-0001-0173#001GBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#001GBC
2GB A02B-0303-H157 A87L-0001-0173#002GBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#002GBC
Connection cable between For 12.1"LCD - A660-2006-T050#L130R0
the main board and the For 15"LCD - A660-2005-T469#L200R0
inverter
Conversion cable (for 15" LCD backlight) - A660-4042-T047 Two cables used
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0281-K801 For main board C1 to C6
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0303-K801 For main board G1 to G6
NOTE
This section describes the printed circuit boards
and units specific to the 300is/310is/320is. For
the printed circuit boards and units common to the
300is/310is/320is and 30i/31i/32i, see Section 2.5.
- 235 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
- 236 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
Claw
- 237 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
4 Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board. The
connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection) directly
connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So, detach the
main board by moving the main board downward.
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
TP2
CD46L
CDP12
CK20A
CK21A
- 238 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power
COP supply unit
Fuse
- 239 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
See Section 2.9, "REPLACING FAN MOTORS" for replacing the fan
motor.
For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch
panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there are
flaws and contamination on this protection sheet that make the screen
hard to read, replace the protection sheet. Prepare the following items.
- 240 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
Backup unit cable
A02B-0281-K801
(for main board C1 t to C6)
Backup unit cable
A02B-0303-K801
(for main board G1 t to G6)
Front view
When the LED (PC POWER) on the main printed circuit board lights,
do not touch any parts in the basic unit and backup unit. The Series
300is/310is/320is operates for about 12 seconds after the main power
is turned off.
NOTE
For the main boards C1 to C6 (cable specification:
A02B-0281-K801), the backup interface connector
(CA55) and MDI connector (CA55) on the main
boards have the same shape.
Be careful not to insert a wrong cable into the
connectors.
- 241 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Procedure
<1> Turn off the CNC power, replace the backup unit, and turn on the
power again.
<2> When the Windows screen appears, press the Ctrl keyrr and Aux
key of the MDI in sequence to display the start menu, and start
Windows Explorer.
<3> Execute "Storage Card¥Fanuc¥NCBOOT32.exe".
<4> When a pop-up menu appears at the lower left of the screen,
select "Open".
<5> Check "Enable battery backup unit" to enable backup operation.
<6> Select "OK" to close NCBOOT32.
<7> Execute "Storage Card¥Fanuc¥NCBOOT32.exe".
<8> When a pop-up menu appears at the lower left of the screen,
select "Save".
<9> Turn off the CNC power and back on again. Confirm that a
backup operates normally and no alarm appears.
- 242 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
- 243 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 244 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Control unit
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Optical cable
I/O Link
- 245 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Main board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
- 246 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Main board
Slot
R232-1(JD56A)
RS-232-C I/O device
5th, 6th spindles
R232-2(JD36A)
RS-232-C I/O device
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
PSM
Position coder
3rd, 4th
spindles
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-2)
COP10B Axis 2
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Axis 4
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Ethernet
- 247 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
SPDL(JA41L)
FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
- 248 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Fast Ethernet
Optional slot
board
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
Profibus master
board
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
Profibus slave
board
PROFI(CN2) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)
DeviceNet slave
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)
FL-net board
- 249 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- The connection diagram of the CNC display unit for automotive manufacturers is
shown below.
Main board
+24V (CPD18)
Card slot
I/OLink(JD1A)
I/OLink(JD1B)
USB mouse
USB keyboard
USB mouse
USB keyboard
- 250 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is required on the unit.
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer
- 251 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
STATUS 7-segment LED: This LED usually indicates the state of the
CNC. This LED is used also for setting
and maintenance using the rotary switch
MTSW and the push switch PSW.
MTSW rotary switch: This rotary switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the
PSW push switch.
PSW push switch: This push switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the
MTSW rotary switch.
- 252 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 253 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 254 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 255 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
- 256 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- LED display
- 257 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Dot
- 258 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
10.4” display unit A1 Without a touch panel A02B-0303-C071
10.4” display unit A2 With a touch panel A02B-0303-C081
10.4” display unit B1 Without a touch panel A02B-0303-C074
10.4” display unit B2 With a touch panel A02B-0303-C084
- 259 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear of unit
CA55
CA55 JA36A
JA36A
CK20A CN1
CN1
COP21A
COP21A
CK21A
CK21A
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Display unit control
board
CA55 COP21A
JA36A
CN1
CK21A
CK20A
- 260 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Rear of unit
CA55 JD36A
CK20A CPD19B
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
COP21B
CA55 JD36A
CK20A CPD19B
CK21A
CP1B CP1A
- 261 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- LED display
(1) Display unit A1 or A2 board
POWER
- 262 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 263 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Positions of the inverter printed circuit board and touch panel printed circuit
board
(1) For display unit A1 or A2
Touch panel printed circuit board
Inverter printed circuit board
(For display unit A2)
Rear of unit
Rear of unit
- 264 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
15” color LCD C1 (soft key) A02B-0303-C091
15” color LCD C2 (soft key/touch panel) A02B-0303-C092
15” color LCD D1 (soft key) A02B-0303-C093
15” color LCD D2 (soft key/touch panel) A02B-0303-C094
- Main board
Name PCB specification
For 15” color LCD C1,C2 A20B-8101-0062
For 15” color LCD D1,D2 A20B-8101-0382
- 265 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rea of unit
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CA98
CA87A
CA95
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
- 266 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Connector
Connecto
(2) Power supply unit
- 267 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
- 268 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- LED display
1) For 15" color LCD C1, C2
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
- 269 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Unit of rear
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)
- 270 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Reserve(Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
Reserve(Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
- 271 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear of unit
- 272 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
First 10.4” display unit E1for Without a touch
A02B-0303-C072
2-unit display panel
Second 10.4” display unit Without a touch
A02B-0303-C073
E2for 2-unit display panel
Inter-unit video cable (30m) A02B-0303-K843
Inter-unit video cable (20m) A02B-0303-K840
Inter-unit video cable (10m) A02B-0303-K841
Inter-unit video cable (5m) A02B-0303-K842
Inter-unit MDI cable (30m) A02B-0303-K848
Inter-unit MDI cable (20m) A02B-0303-K845
Inter-unit MDI cable (10m) A02B-0303-K846
Inter-unit MDI cable (5m) A02B-0303-K847
- 273 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
CA103
JA73
CA55
CK20A
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
CA103
JA73 COP21B
CA55
CK21A
- 274 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- LED display
- 275 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
CA103
JA73
CA55
CK20A
COP21B
CK21A
CP1B CP1A
- 276 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Main PCB
Name PCB specification
Main PCB of the CNC display unit for automotive
manufacturers A20B-8101-0385
Main PCB
- 277 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
CA98
CA87A
Main PCB
CA88A
CA95
CA113
CD38S CD46L
CPD15
COP21M
CA117 CPD18
CA55
- 278 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
- 279 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Block diagram
Main PCB
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT
software
Compact
Flash card Peripheral
Peripheral
control 2 control 1 Power supply unit
5V, 3.3V,
2.5V
USB control
- 280 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- LED display
CA87A CA98
Main PCB
CA95 CA88A
CA113
CD38S CD46L
CPD15
COP21M
CPD18
CA117
CA55
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green) ALM2 BSRDY
LINK(green) (red) (green)
COM(orange)
- 281 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
ABC CAPS
(green) LOCK
(green)
RESERVE(OPEN)
Ensure that this is left open.
- 282 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
Conversion
cable for the
inverter
- 283 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01 CPD12
CN03
CN04
CN05
- 284 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Power cable
(A660-2005-T779#L160R0)
- 285 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Use of NCBOOT32
1. Purpose
NCBOOT32 perform the following operations.
• Displays the BOOT screen.
On this screen, it is possible to perform CNC maintenance work
such as installation or backup of the CNC system program or
saving, restoration, or clearing of SRAM.
• Displays the IPL screen.
• Displays the CNC alarm screen.
• Monitors the state of communication with the CNC and makes
reconnection during occurrence of an error.
2. Startup
The rotary switch on the Series 30i/31i/32i-A CNC main printed
circuit board can be used to change the startup sequence.
To start NCBOOT32 or return to the normal operation, turn off the
power, change the position of the rotary switch, and turn on the power
again.
<2> To switch between tab screens, press the left or right arrow
key.
- 286 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 288 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 289 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 290 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 291 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Item Specification
Main board A(Pentium 3, for 10.4”VGA LCD and A20B-8100-0935
12.1”SVGA LCD) A20B-8101-0505
Main board A (Pentium 3, for 10.4”SVGA LCD) A20B-8100-0939
A20B-8101-0505
Main board A (Pentium 3, for 15.0”XGA LCD) A20B-8100-0936
A20B-8101-0506
Main board B (Pentium M, for 10.4”VGA LCD and A20B-8101-0365
12.1”SVGA LCD)
Main board B (Pentium M, for 10.4”SVGA LCD) A20B-8101-0369
Main board B (Pentium M, for 15.0”XGA LCD) A20B-8101-0366
Backpanel (for Pentium 3) A20B-8002-0330
Backpanel (for Pentium M) A20B-8002-0331
Power supply P.C.B. A20B-2100-0920
VR1
CPU
CA79
Socket
Chipset1
PCMCIA
(GMCH)
Controller
DIMM Socket (SD-RAM)
CA82
JA64
CK22
CPD12
CK23
BIOS Chipset2 Chipset3
(ICH2) SIO
CD46L
ROM
CD37
CPC11
CD41M
CD41L
JD33
JD46
JA61
JA63
JD9
CD34 CD32U
(上)
CA81A
CK21
CK20
CD38U CD32L
CA86
(下)
CA81B
GR4 GR6 TM22A TM7A
TM6 TM5 TM1 (093x) (093x)
GR6
RE4
RE2
RE3
RE1
GR5
GR4
- 292 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
CA79
CPU Socket
Chipset1 PCMCIA
(GMCH) Controller
DIMM Socket (DDR-SDRAM)
CA82
JA64
CK22
CPD12
CK23
Chipset3
Chipset2 SIO
CD46L
CD37
(ICH2)
BIOS
ROM
CPC11
CD41M
CD41L
JD33
JD46
JA61
JA63
JD9
CD34 CD32U
(上)
CA81A
CK21
CK20
CD32L
CD38U
CA86
(下)
CA81B
GR4 GR6
LED
TM5 TM1
GR6
RE2
RE3
RE1
RE4
GR3 GR5
GR2 GR4
TM18
TM3 Jumper pin
06F : General version 06F and later TM4 LED
GR1
05E : General version 05E and earlier (05E) (06F)
(3) Backpanel
- 293 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
CN3
CPE11B
CPE11A
CPD14
CPD11A
CPD11B
CPD11C
FUSE
CPE11C
CPD12
- 294 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Block diagram
Touch panel
CD37
PCMCIA I/F PCMCIA Clock generator
CA82 controller JA63 CRT
USB I/F
CD46L CPU CD34 FDD SIGNAL
Memory
DIMM CD32L KEYBOARD
CNA1
Chipset
CA85 (GMCH)
LCD signal LVDS DV CD32U MOUSE
line
CA79
LVDS RV Chipset Chipset JD9 CENTRO
(ICH2) (SIO)
JD33 RS232-1
JD46 RS232-2/USB
Main
board PHY
PCI CD38U ETHERNET
Inverter CPC11
bus
CD41L USB1
Power CD41M USB2
supply
circuit MDI
Vtt,Vcore, controller JA61 MDI I/F
1.5V,1.8V,
CK20 2.5V CA81A HDD-1
Soft key (horizontal type)
Soft key (vertical type) CK21 CK22
CA81B HDD-2
CPD12 JA64
CN3
Battery
CK22
DV Clock generator
40-mm-square
fan CPE11A PCI extension slot
CA78A
- 295 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
These jumper pins may be set up differently if the
unit is configured for some specific manufacturers.
- 296 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
VR1: This variable resistor is intended to adjust signals for the 15" LCD.
It is factory-set properly. Do not change the setting.
VR1
RE2
RE3
RE1
RE4
GR5
GR4
GR6
CD41M
CD32
GR3
GR2
GR1
Name 1 Name 2 Color Status
RE1 TRM Red Temperature alarm. It is issued if a temperature
outside a specified range is detected.
RE2 BAT Red Battery alarm. It indicates that the battery be replaced.
RE3 FAN Red Indicates that one of the two basic-unit fans or the HDD
fan has stopped. Replace it.
When this LED lights, even if nothing is displayed on
screen and the fan operates normally, this unit may be
in the reset state.
RE3 S5 Red Indicates that the power-off state (Soft Off) is entered.
Generally, this LED does not remain on, but it may
remain on and nothing is displayed on screen if BIOS is
incorrectly set. In this case, clear CMOS data.
GR1 5V Green Indicates that the unit is powered.
GR2 HDD Green Indicates that the HDD is being accessed.
GR3 PCM Green Indicates that the PCMCIA card is being accessed.
GR4 LINK Green Indicates that the Ethernet link is running.
GR5 100M Green Indicates that the Ethernet link is running at 100 MHz.
GR6 ACT Green Indicates that the Ethernet network is running.
- 297 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Item Specification
Main board (15” LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B021,-B022 A20B-8101-0061
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002 A20B-8101-0063
Main board (10.4" and 12.1" LCD or
specification) A20B-8101-0067
For A13B-0198-B011,-B012,-B032 A20B-8101-0063
Main board (10.4"LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B041,-B043 A20B-8101-0380
Main board (12.1"LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B051,-B052,-B053 A20B-8101-0383
Main board (15”LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B061,-B063 A20B-8101-0381
- 298 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Connector unit
CA75
or
CD38S CA113
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA95 CA75
or
CD38S CA113 CD46L
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
- 299 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 300 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
- 301 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
- 302 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Block diagram
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Main board
GUI card
DRAMM Display control
CPU
BOOT Compact
software Flash card
Power supply
Peripheral Peripheral unit
control 2 control 1 5V, 3.3V,
2.5V
USB Ethernet
control control
Display unit
- 303 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Main board
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT
software
Display unit
RS232C
HSSB 24VDC
Ethernet USB Memory card゙
- 304 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- LED display
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
- 305 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)
- 306 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Reserve(Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Short or Reserve
Reserve(Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
- 307 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
- 308 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
CPD12
For 12.1” LCD
Fan adapter
CN1
Conversion cable
- 309 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Rear of unit
Rear of unit
- 310 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Rear of unit
- 311 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
NOTE
For A13B-0198-B001, -B002, -B011, -B012, -B021,
-B022, and -B032 (cable specification:
A02B-0281-K801), the MDI connector (CA55) and
the backup interface connector (CA75) on the main
board have the same shape, so be careful not to
insert a wrong cable into the connectors.
- 312 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 313 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 314 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 315 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 316 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 317 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 318 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 319 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 320 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Drive units
Maintenance drive Parent
Item Unit Remarks
unit drawing number specification
PANEL i in A08B-0084-C120#E A08B-0084-H120
3.5” HDD unit automotive A08B-0084-C120#F
*1 *2 manufacturer
specification
PANEL i A08B-0084-C130#E A08B-0084-H130 When 10.4” LCD and
A08B-0084-C130#F QWERTY MDI are
used.
A08B-0084-C131#E A08B-0084-H131 When 10.4” LCD and
A08B-0084-C131#F QWERTY MDI are
used.
FDD unit (common) A02B-0207-C009 - Panel mounted type
FDD cable (common) A02B-0207-K801 - Length : 1m
FDD drive unit (common) A08B-0084-K001 - FDD
PANEL i in A08B-0084-K010 -
automotive
CD-ROM unit CD-ROM drive
manufacturer
specification
CAUTION
A combination of hard disk, floppy disk, and
CD-ROM drives may fail to operate normally if any
of them is not recommended by FANUC.
- 321 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- CF card unit
Maintenance drive unit Parent
Item Unit Remarks
drawing number specification
CF card (common) A87L-0001-0197#2GB A08B-0086-H100 2GB
(master) *1 to H104
CF card (common) A87L-0001-0197#128MB A08B-0086-H101 128MB
(slave) *1 (common) A87L-0001-0197#256MB A08B-0086-H102 256MB
A87L-0001-0197#1GB A08B-0086-H104 1GB
CF card adapter PCB (common) A20B-8002-0660 A08B-0086-H100
*1 to H104
*1: The CF card and CF card adapter PCB may be changed in the
future.
CAUTION
This unit may not operate with a CF card other
than those specified by FANUC.
*3: Unlike the parent specification (basic unit), the maintenance base
unit does not include any of the main printed-circuit board,
backplane printed-circuit board, power supply printed-circuit
board, cover, and inverter. It mainly consists of the base plate,
LCD unit, ornamental frame, touch panel, and soft keys.
- 322 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 323 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Maintenance base
LCD I/O Link Soft Touch
Unit unit drawing Parent specification
type adapter key panel
number *3
Present ○ × A08B-0086-D413 A08B-0086-B432 A13B-0199-B432
A08B-0086-B732 A13B-0199-B732
*5
○ ○ A08B-0086-D414 A08B-0086-B433 A13B-0199-B433
A08B-0086-B733 A13B-0199-B733
*5
*3: Unlike the parent specification (basic unit), the maintenance base
unit does not include any of the main printed-circuit board,
backplane printed-circuit board, power supply printed-circuit
board, cover, and inverter. It mainly consists of the base plate,
LCD unit, ornamental frame, touch panel, and soft keys.
*4: For maintenance of A08B-0086-D5x3 or -D5x4, when using
A08B-0086-D5x5 or -D5x6, change the touch panel printed
circuit board from A20B-8002-0310 to A20B-8002-0312
accordingly.
*5: For maintenance of A08B-0086-D40x, when using
A08B-0086-D41x, change the touch panel printed circuit board
from A20B-8002-0310 to A20B-8002-0312 accordingly.
Maintenance equipment
Maintaining the unit or installing applications in it requires the
following equipment.
- 324 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 325 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 326 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 327 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- GUI card
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Parent
Type Ordering code Remarks
specification
GUI card for DRAM 64MB A13B-0198-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
10.4”/15”LCD DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
GUI card for DRAM 64MB A13B-0198-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X1
12.1”LCD DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H143 A20B-3300-0424 ID=0001X1
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Parent
Type Ordering code Remarks
specification
GUI card DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
DRAM 256MB A13B-0198-H146 A20B-3300-0552 ID=0110XX
- Base unit
Parent
Item Ordering code Remarks
specification
Base unit A02B-0303-H160 A20B-2100-0820 For installation on the back
of the MDI unit
A02B-0303-C161 For installation in the
cabinet
Backup unit cable A02B-0281-K801 A660-2042-T196#L500R0A For
A13B-0198-B001,-B002,
-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
A02B-0303-K801 A660-2006-T312#L500R0 For
A13B-0198-B041,-B043,
-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
- 328 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 329 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
4.8.7 I/O
- 330 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 331 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove
the cause of the fuse burn-out.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed
by a person fully trained in maintenance and
safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the
fuse, take extreme care not to touch any
high-voltage area (marked with and covered
by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
uncovered, direct contact with this area will result
in an electric shock.
Main board
Fuse
24V connector
CPD19A
CPD19B
- 332 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control
unit. The power to the SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery
mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The above data is not
lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup battery is
mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can maintain the
contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT"
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.
- 333 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause
an explosion. Avoid using any battery other than
the one specified here (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Complete steps 1 to 3 within 30 minutes.
If the battery is left removed for a long time, the
SRAM would lose the contents.
If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be
completed within 30 minutes, save the whole
contents of the SRAM to a memory card. The
contents of the memory can be easily restored with
the memory card in case the memory loses the
contents.
- 334 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
CAUTION
In the power-off state, the battery should be
replaced as in the case of the lithium battery, which
is descried above.
2 dry cells
Lid
Connection terminal
on the back
4 mounting holes
Case
- 335 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
When replacing the lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
- General method
Use the connector connected to the lithium battery for an external
battery.
Following the battery replacement procedure described above, replace
the standard lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
(A02B-0236-C281).
CAUTION
1 Place the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in such
a position that the battery can be replaced even
while the control unit is active.
2 The connector of the battery cable uses a simple
lock system. Fix the cable within an area of 50 cm
from the connector, removing tension on the cable.
This is required to prevent the connector from
coming off because of the weight of the cable or
tension on the cable.
- 336 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
When a reduction in the speed of the fan motor is detected, the FAN
warning message blinks on the LCD screen.
When a failure such as stop of the fan motor is detected, an overheat
alarm or system alarm is issued and the system stops operating.
Therefore, as soon as the FAN warning appears, replace the fan motor.
WARNING
If the cabinet is opened to replace a fan unit, take
extreme care not to touch any high-voltage area
(marked with and covered by a shock prevention
cover). If the area is uncovered, direct contact
with this area will result in an electric shock.
- 337 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Latched Unlatched
CAUTION
Just disengage the latch. Do not push up the latch
after the latch is disengaged. If you continue
pushing up the latch forcibly, the latch can break.
<3> Place a finger at the bottom of the front of the fan unit then push
up the fan unit.
<4> Push up the fan unit until the fan unit is slanted by about 30
degrees.
<5> Pull out the fan unit toward you in the slanted direction.
<4> Push up the fan unit until it <5> Pull out the fan unit toward
is slanted by about 30 you in the slanted direction.
degrees.
- 338 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
<1> Insert the fan unit at <2> Lower the fan unit. <3> Push down the fan unit to
an angle of about 30 couple it with the main
degrees. unit.
CAUTION
The fan unit and main unit are coupled directly with
each other by a connector. The coupling section of
the connector can break if the units are coupled
incorrectly.
<4> Push down the latch at the top of the fan unit for latching.
Push down the latch.
Unlatched Latched
<5> Turn on the power, then check that no fan alarm is issued and
that both fans are rotating.
NOTE
1 If the power is turned on when the fan unit and the
main unit are not coupled correctly, the fans do not
rotate or a fan alarm is issued even through the
fans are rotating.
2 When a large amount of force is required to couple
the fan unit with the main unit, check if pins of the
connector of the base printed circuit board are bent
and if the base printed circuit board is inserted
correctly.
- 339 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove
the cause of the fuse burn-out.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed
by a person fully trained in maintenance and
safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the
fuse, take extreme care not to touch any
high-voltage area (marked with and covered
by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
uncovered, direct contact with this area will result
in an electric shock.
Fuse
- 340 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Rear view
Fuse
- 341 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Replacement procedure
Claws
Screws
NOTE) The screws are attached to the case so as not to be
dropped.
1 Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan need not be detached.
2 Remove the cables from connectors CA88A (PCMCIA interface
connector), CD46L (USB mouse and USB keyboard connector
interface), JD54 (USB mouse and USB keyboard connector
interface), CA98 (video signal interface connector), CPD12
(inverter interface), CA117 (LED interface), and CPD15 (I/O
Link adapter DC power interface) on the main PCB. When the
touch panel is attached, remove CA95 (touch panel interface).
- 342 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main PCB
CA95
CD46L
JD54 JD36
CDP12
CPD15
CA117
- 343 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the card
PCB, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Method of extraction
1 Pull up the spacer metal fitting.
2 Insert your finger into the gap on the back of the GUI card and
lift it up slowly in the direction indicated by the arrow in step 2-2
in the figure below. (Note: At this time, hold the neighborhood of
the main board on the opposite side with the other hand
whenever possible. A force of 7 to 8 kgf is required for
extraction. Be careful not to drop the card board due to the
momentum of extraction.)
3 When one side of the card board is raised slightly by pulling up
the cover, do not fully extract the card board, but push back the
cover softly.
4 When the card board is pushed back to be parallel with the main
board, pinch two sides of the card board and pull up the card
board. This completes the extraction of the card board.
Insert your finger into the gap on the back of
the GUI card and lift it up slowly in the
direction indicated by the arrow to remove it. Push back the
cover softly.
Connector side
240-pin
Spacer side
connector on
the back
Side view
- 344 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Method of insertion
1 Check that the metal fittings of the spacers are raised.
2 To align the card board insertion position, touch the spacer fixing
end faces of the card board with the spacers as shown in the
figure below. (At this time, the board can be touched with the
spacers for easier position alignment by slightly holding up the
connector side and lowering the spacer side only.)
3 While aligning the card board with the spacers, lower the
connector side slowly then cause the connectors to touch each
other.
4 Push the connector side of the card board slowly. At this time,
push the card board against the board on the rear side of the
connector. The force required for connector insertion is about 10
kgf. If the connector cannot be mated by a force of about 10 kgf
or more, the card board may be aligned incorrectly, and the
connector can break. In this case, realign the card board. (Note:
Do not press the radiation fin installed on an LSI chip. Otherwise,
the radiation fin can break.)
5 Push in the spacer metal fittings.
Spacer
Spacer fixing
end face
Connector side
Spacer side
240-pin
connector on
the back
Spacer
- 345 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the
module, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Method of extraction
1 Raise the stopper of the compact flash card socket.
2 Turn the latch inward and pull out the card.
Method of insertion
1 Raise the stopper and insert the card into the socket.
2 Push the card until it is locked.
3 Lower the stopper to fix the card.
Latch
Compact flash card socket
Stopper
- 346 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Fuse specification
Ordering code Rating
A02B-0236-K100 5A
Fuse
- 347 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing the fan
motor, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover). Touching the uncovered high-voltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric
shock hazard.
Replacement procedure
1 Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
2 Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig. a).
The connector is latched. Unplug the connector while holding
down the latch placed at the upper part of the cable connector.
3 Detach the latch securing the fan motor, then demount the fan
motor ((2) of Fig. a).
4 Insert a new fan motor into the fan case ((3) of Fig. a), then
reconnect the connector.
Fig. a
(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case
- 348 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- Replacement procedure
1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touch
panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of the
touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
⇒ If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left on
the surface. Remove oil completely.
⇒ If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel,
the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely
and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
- 349 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Fold
OK NG
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection sheet.
⇒ With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the touch
panel, do not attempt to correct the position of the
protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the entire
sheet completely.
⇒ Check that the four corners and four sides of the protection
sheet do not float.
- 350 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
3. When the crosshair cursor appears, press and hold the center of
the cursor until it disappears (about three seconds).
4. When the cursor position moves, perform step 3 again. Repeat
this process a total of five times.
5. Press the RETURN key to close the calibration screen. To
cancel the settings of the touch panel, press the ESC key.
- 351 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
Insert a new battery within 5 minutes after the old
battery is removed from the connector.
Usually, following the battery replacement
procedure stated below will not lose the BIOS
settings. Should they be lost, the messages ”251:
System CMOS checksum bad – Default
configuration used.” and “Press <F2> to enter
SETUP” appear when the power is turned on.
If you have been using non-default BIOS settings
for the PANEL i, re-set them up exactly. Usually,
the unit is used with the default settings.
Connector
(BAT1)
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
- 352 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
(1) Removing the LCD cable (for the 15.0” LCD only)
<4> <3>
<1>
<2>
<1> Remove the screw from the upper right section of the unit.
<2> Cut the cable clamp.
<3> Remove the video connector fastener.
<4> Detach the video connector.
<1> Pull out the two fan cables. The connectors are latched in
a simple manner. Pull them out by holding down the
latch with a flat-blade screwdriver.
<2> Pull out the battery cable.
- 353 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
<2> <1>
b
d
c e
<1> For units other than the 15” LCD, remove the screw (a)
from the upper right section of the unit.
<2> Remove the other screws (b to e) from the case.
- 354 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
(5) Checking the shape of the PCI holding plate at the bottom of the
unit
(6) Removing the PCI holding plate 1 (for the old type only)
(7) Removing the PCI holding plate 2 (for the old type only)
<1> <2>
<3>
- 355 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 356 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Be careful not to have the case cover caught on Make sure that the power supply PCB and
the DIMM latch. backplane PCB get in grooves.
(2) Mount the PCI holder, and fasten the case cover with screws (4
or 5 places).
(3) Mount the PCI card and the PCI card holder.
- 357 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
40-mm-square fan
60-mm-square fan
Battery
(5) Attach the LCD cable, and mount the metal fitting and cable
clamp.
(For the 15.0” LCD unit only)
- 358 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
NOTE
First find out what caused the fuse to blow, and then
remove the cause.
The fuse blows if there is a short-circuit in the PANEL i.
If the fuse has blown, check to see if:
• A conductor has touched the main printed-circuit board.
• The PCI expansion board is defective or inserted
incorrectly.
• The cable is connected incorrectly.
If any fuse blows, it is likely that some failure or another
may have occurred in the system. Before turning on the
power again, make sure that the system is intact by
inspecting it visually and smelling it. If you find any
defective part, you need to have it replaced.
(1) Remove the connection cable, and take off the PANEL i from the
cabinet.
(2) Remove the cover. (See Subsection 4.14.2.)
(3) Remove the blown fuse, and install a new one securely.
(4) Mount the cover, and re-install the PANEL i (see Subsection
4.14.3). Attach the cable.
(5) Turn on the power, and make sure that the PANEL i gets started.
Fuse
A08B-0084-K020
- 359 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
60-mm-square fan
A08B-0084-K101
Be careful not to
mount the fan in the
wrong orientation.
40-mm-square
fan
A08B-0084-K100
Be careful not to
mount the fan in
the wrong
orientation.
(40-mm-square fan) CPE11A
- 360 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
NOTE
Before replacing a fan in a unit designed to the
auto maker’s specification, remove the HDD unit.
To power supply P.C.B.
CPE11C (3 pins)
Fan
A08B-0084-K102
Be careful not to
mount the fan in the
wrong orientation.
Air Flow
Two screws
Fig. 11.4.5(c) Replacing the fan for the HDD (for unit designed to auto
maker’s specification)
- 361 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
- 362 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
- 363 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
For the 15.0” LCD type, it is impossible to replace
the backlight independently. It must be replaced
together with the maintenance base unit
(A08D-0084-Dxxx).
- 364 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Screw (three
places)
PCMCIA cable
USB cable
- 365 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Screws
- 366 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
8 As shown below, unlock and pull out the case that contains the
backlight, and then replace the backlight.
LCD Rear
view
Lock
CAUTION
When pulling out the backlight, do not pull the
cable.
- 367 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
Protection sheet
2 Wipe dirt, moisture, grease, and protection sheet glue residual (if
any) off the LCD surface carefully.
3 As shown in the figure at the lower left, fold the tab of the
protection sheet toward the front side (to about 60 degrees).
- 368 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
Protection
sheet
Surface
5 Paste the protection sheet with its tab at the upper right while
being careful to protect the gap between the LCD panel and the
protection sheet from dirt and any other foreign matter.
- 369 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
Claw
- 370 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CA95
CD46L
CDP12
CK20A
CK21A
- 371 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove
the cause of the fuse burn-out.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed
by a person fully trained in maintenance and
safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the
fuse, take extreme care not to touch any
high-voltage area (marked with and covered
by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
uncovered, direct contact with this area will result
in an electric shock.
Rear of unit
Fuse
- 372 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan
motor, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
- Replacing Method
See "Replacing the protect sheet" in Section 5.7, "LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY (LCD)".
- 373 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- 374 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030
JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector
CNH6
CD38R
- 375 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- LED indications
The board incorporates the following LEDs: Four green STATUS
LEDs and one red ALARM LED for indicating the status. Two green
LEDs, one yellow LED, and one red LED for indicating the
communication status. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as
follows:
: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care
CD38R
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(STASUS) (green)
3(STATUS) (green)
2(STATUS) (green)
1(STATUS) (green)
- 376 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Immediately after one of the following:
power-on → The firmware is not stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC.
→ The board is defective.
The board has started.
Start of board If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
be defective.
The firmware has been downloaded to the board.
Completion of firmware
If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
downloading
be defective.
The firmware OS has started.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
one of the following:
Firmware OS started.
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Completion of firmware one of the following:
OS initialization → The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
The Ethernet parameters have been read.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Completion of one of the following:
parameter reading → The Ethernet option or Data Server option is not
installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
Start completion The board has started normally.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Normal status The board is operating normally.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED indication Status Meaning
100BASE-TX
BTX The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
connection in progress
10BASE-T connection
BTX The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
in progress
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
Transmission/
COM Data is being transmitted or received.
reception in progress
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued
- 377 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long
on-time and short on-time.
LED LED
indication indication
[Long on-time] [Short on-time]
Status Description
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a problem on another
board board was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general
Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
instruction
Illegal slot instruction Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off
with long on-time and short on-time in a manner
not indicated above, contact FANUC.
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED indication Status Description
The LED is on or blinks at short intervals
COL ■ Collision occurs. when the Ethernet communication traffic
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.) (communication amount) is high or ambient
noise is high.
The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also when
LIL □ Not connected to hub the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to
the hub properly.
A parity error occurred in memory on the
ALM ■ Parity error occurs.
board. The board is defective.
- 378 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A
- Block diagram
Servo control
FSSB I/F
BACKPLANE
- 379 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- LED display
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
FSSB_OP
- 380 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320
JGP
(JA71L: Additional spindle board B only)
JA41L
- Block diagram
Spindle control
Serial
spindle
BACKPLANE
- 381 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Item Function Ordering code
HSSB interface board HSSB × 1 channel A20B-8101-0111
JGP
COP21N
- Block diagram
HSSB control
Personal
computer
or
PANEL i
BACKPLANE
- 382 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- LED display
LEDR (red)
BRDYA (green)
- 383 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Item Ordering code
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031
LSI
MPU
CD38N
- 384 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- LED indications
The board incorporates the following LEDs: Four green STATUS
LEDs and one red ALARM LED for indicating the status. Two green
LEDs, one yellow LED, and one red LED for indicating the
communication status. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as
follows:
: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care
CD38N
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(POK) (STASUS) (green)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.
- 385 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Immediately after one of the following:
power-on → The firmware is not stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC.
→ The board is defective.
The board has started.
Start of board If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
be defective.
The firmware has been downloaded to the board.
Completion of firmware
If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
downloading
be defective.
The firmware OS has started.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
one of the following:
Firmware OS started.
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Completion of firmware one of the following:
OS initialization → The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
◊◊ Start completion The board has started normally.
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED indication Status Meaning
ROS Normal software Blinks at 1-second intervals when the communication
operation software on the FL-net board operates normally.
RES Normally OFF Normally, off
LNK Participating in network Turned on when the node participates in the FL-net
network
POK Normal parameters Turned on when all FL-net parameters are valid.
LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED indication Status Meaning
10BASE-T connection
BTX The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
in progress
100BASE-TX
BTX The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
connection in progress
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
Transmission/
COM Data is being transmitted or received.
reception in progress
ALM
No alarm No alarm is issued
(HER)
- 386 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long
on-time and short on-time.
LED LED
indication indication
[Long on-time] [Short on-time]
Status Description
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a problem on another
board board was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general
Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
instruction
Illegal slot instruction Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off
with long on-time and short on-time in a manner
not indicated above, contact FANUC.
LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED indication Status Description
COL ■ Collision occurs. When a data collision occurs on the
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.) network, the LED is lit or blinks. (Note)
The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also when
LIL □ Not connected to hub the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to
the hub properly.
ALM ■ A parity error occurred in memory on the
Parity error occurs.
(HER) board. The board is defective.
NOTE
The FL-net manages the token-based transmission
right so that no collision occurs. If this LED is
turned on frequently, a communication error has
occurred due to noise, or an Ethernet compliant
product other than the FL-net is connected.
In such a case, check the devices connected to the
network and the network installation status.
- 387 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- Specification
Item Ordering code Remarks
PROFIBUS Master board A20B-8101-0050 Master function only
PROFIBUS Slave board A20B-8101-0100 Slave function only
MPU
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN1 LSI
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN2
LSI
- 388 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
CN1
LED2 LED1
NOTE
The face plate is indicated by the broken line.
LED
Color Description
name
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started
running.
LED1 Green ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to
start running.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Indicates whether communication is being normally
carried out.
LED2 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
- 389 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
CN2
NOTE
The face plate is indicated by the broken line.
LED
Color Description
name
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started
running.
LED1 Green ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to
start running.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Indicates that communication has started.
ON: Communication has started.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on or if:
LED2 Green - No parameter data and configuration data have been
received.
- Invalid parameter data and configuration data have
been received.
Indicates whether communication is being normally
carried out.
LED3 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Indicates that a RAM parity alarm condition has
occurred on this board.
ON: A RAM parity alarm condition has occurred.
LEDB Green
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Once it has been turned on, it stays on until the power is
turned off.
- 390 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Specification
Item Ordering code Remarks
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330
LSI
Daughter board
From left to
right
LEDWD
LED3
LED2 NS MS (LED)
LED1
LED0
Outside line
connector
TBL
Face plate
- 391 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- Slave board
LED
Green LED3
Green LED2
Green LED1
Green LED0
LED
Green
Green
LEDWD Red
Red
Red
MS NS
Face plate
- 392 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (during power-on)
- 393 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- 394 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Slave board
This board provides four green LEDs (LED0 to LED3) and one red
LED (LEDWD) for status indication.
In addition, there are two LED sets (MS and NS) that consist of one
red LED and one green LED.
- 395 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication
normal" status is not made, confirm that the power
for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
- 396 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
LED
Status Description
indication
MS Green The onboard firmware is being
MS Red Immediately initialized when the onboard MPU is in
NS Green after power-on the reset status or reset release
NS Red status.
The onboard firmware performs
MS Green processing in the order below.
MS Red Communication <1> Waits for the DeviceNet
NS Green under application software to be
NS Red preparation initialized.
<2> Checks the baud rate.
<3> Checks MAC ID duplication.
Waiting for
MS Green
establishment of
MS Red
I/O
NS Green
communication
NS Red
to be established
MS Green
I/O Each status corresponds to DeviceNet
MS Red
communication MPU status transition NOTE).
NS Green
normal
NS Red
MS ◇ Green
I/O
MS ◇ Red
communication
NS Green
timeout
NS Red
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication
normal" status is not made, confirm that the power
for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
- 397 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
LED
Status Error and action
indication
Check the following and then turn the
Duplicate MAC slave power off and back on again.
IDs → MAC IDs are not duplicate by check
the MAC IDs of all nodes.
MS ◇ Green Check the following and then turn the
MS ◇ Red slave power off and back on again.
→ The communication rates of all nodes
NS Green
are set to the same value.
NS Red
Busoff detection → The cable length is appropriate.
→ The cable is not loose or broken.
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends
of the main line.
→ There are not much noise.
MS Green Remove the noise factor and then turn
Other
MS Red the slave power off and back on again.
unrecoverable
NS ◇ Green When the error persists, replace the
onboard failures
NS ◇ Red DeviceNet slave board.
- 398 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Table 5.1.8
No. Name
1 PROFIBUS master board
Fast Ethernet board (This board also is used when Data Server is
2
used.)
3 FL-net board
4 DeviceNet master board
5 DeviceNet slave board
6 PROFIBUS slave board
7 HSSB board
8 Additional spindle board
9 Additional axis board
LCD-mounted type CNC Stand-alone type CNC
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
- 399 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- 400 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- 401 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a card
PCB, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
SRAM data of the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of
the SRAM memory may be lost during replacement
work. (See Appendix C.2.5.)
- 402 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
240-pin
Spacer side
connector on
the back
Side view
Connector side
240-pin
Spacer side
connector
on the back
- 403 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Spacer
Spacer side
240-pin
connector on
the back
Spacer
- 404 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a module,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
SRAM data of the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of
the SRAM memory may be lost during replacement
work.
Before replacing the SRAM module, make a
backup copy of the SRAM data. Restore it after
replacement. (See Appendix C.2.5.)
- 405 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
(2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (See Fig. c.)
At this time, push it down with pushing two points of (*) in the
figure.
Fig. a
Fig. b
Fig. c
(*)
(*)
- 406 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the
module, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover). Touching the uncovered high-voltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric
shock hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
SRAM data of the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of
the SRAM memory may be lost during replacement
work. (See Appendix C.2.5.)
- 407 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Retainer
- 408 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A02B-0303-C205
Additional unit A02B-0236-C204
JF101(JF105)
JF102(JF106)
JF103(JF107)
JF104(JF108)
JA4A
- 409 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and OPEN) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are
indicated below.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 OPEN
LED indication
- 410 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A06B-6061-C201
The additional unit A02B-0236-C204 mentioned in the previous
subsection can be used with this interface unit.
JF111
JF112
JF113
JF114
JA4A
- 411 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and OPEN) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are
indicated below.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
LED indication
- 412 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Name Specification
For AS-i Ver 2.0 A03B-0817-C001
For AS-i Ver 2.1 A03B-0817-C002
- 413 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
(1) LED
- 414 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- 415 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
X1 X1 X1 X1
●B- ●B- ●B- ●B-
SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE
- 416 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
NOTE
If a slave unit with address "0" is connected, no
configuration registration is made and the
protected mode is not selected. Alarm "E5" is
displayed.
- 417 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- 418 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
NOTE
- In the protected mode, the lowest address number among those encountering a
configuration mismatch is displayed. In the configuration mode, nothing is
displayed.
- Use ladder programs to detect and display converter unit errors.
- If a converter unit error occurs, both the DO and DI are turned off.
- If it is impossible to continue AS-i communication, a watchdog alarm condition
occurs in the slave unit. How the DO behaves at the watchdog alarm is
determined according to the slave unit type and parameter setting used. See the
relevant slave unit specification.
- How to handle AS-i master EEPROM errors
If the 7-segment LEDs display "E1", it is likely that the registered configuration may
be corrupted. So, register it again according to the following chart.
Turn off power
Keep switch in SET position until LED "CM" changes from off to on or from on to off.
(This operation may take 5 seconds or more.)
Take your hand off switch, and turn power off and on again to restart system.
If 7-segment LEDs do not display "E1", registered configuration has been repaired.
(If LED "CM" lights, protect registered configuration for subsequent operation. Keep switch in SET position
until "E1" disappears. This operation takes 5 seconds or more.)
Note that if "E1" is displayed, the CNC may fail to start up.
The converter having this function is one shipped in or after June 2005.
Those shipped before do not support this function. If EEPROM fails to operate
normally, replace the converter unit.
- 419 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- How to re-install
Once the I/O Link - AS-i converter is replaced, the new I/O Link - AS-i must be loaded with AS-i slave information
according to the following procedure.
The procedure can be executed even when no I/O Link is connected (when power is supplied to the I/O Link - AS-i
converter but not to the CNC or when no I/O Link cable is attached).
Start
Mount I/O Link-AS-i converter, AS-i slave, and AS-i power supply.
NO
Keep pressing SET switch for at least 5 seconds to select configuration mode.
Press DISP switch and check slave number of currently connected slave.
End of loading
NOTE
1 When the protected mode is selected, the slave
configuration is registered, and automatic
addressing is enabled.
2 Turning the I/O Link-AS-i converter power on/off
causes no operation mode change. To change
the operation modes, use the SET switch.
- 420 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic module A03B-0823-C001
Expansion module A A03B-0823-C002
Expansion module B A03B-0823-C003
Expansion module C A03B-0823-C004
Expansion module D A03B-0823-C005
CA105
T2
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
T4 CP11A 24-VDC power supply input
CP11B 24-VDC power supply output
JD1A Second I/O link stage
JD1B First I/O link stage
T3 CA105 Expansion module connection
JD1A T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
CP11A
JD1B
LED displays
- 421 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
T2
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
JA3 MPG interface
T4 CA105 Expansion module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
CA106 Expansion module connection
(to previous-stage basic module)
T3 T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
JA3
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights when DO is on.
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Lights when DI is on.
- 422 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
T2
T1
Connector Use
/terminal
T4 board
number
CA105 Expansion module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
T3 CA106 Expansion module connection
(to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights when DO is on.
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Lights when DI is on.
- 423 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
CA105
CA106
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
CA105 Expansion module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
T2
CA106 Expansion module connection
(to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights when DO is on.
ALARM 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights to indicate an alarm.
- 424 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
CA105
CA106
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
CA105 Expansion module connection
T2
(to next-stage expansion module)
CA106 Expansion module connection
(to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board
with yellow label
T2 Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board
with pink label
Rotary switch
- 425 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
NOTE
1 If the overheat or overvoltage protection function
mentioned above operates, the corresponding DO
bit is kept off until the cause is removed. Once the
cause is removed, the DO bit becomes on even if
the system is not restarted.
2 Broken-wire detection is performed by monitoring
the current flowing through a load connected when
the DO is on with an output device in the module. If
the detected current becomes about 100 mA or
lower, it is assumed that a broken wire has been
detected. For this reason, if a light load (such as an
LED) is connected, a broken wire is detected,
resulting in a DO alarm condition. However, unlike
the other protection functions, the broken-wire
detection function does not cause the DO to
become off. In addition, if a connected condition is
resumed after a broken-wire condition is detected,
the broken-wire condition can be removed even if
the system is not restarted.
- 426 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
• Materials used
(1) Protection sheet
A02B-0236-K110 : For 10.4" LCD with touch panel
A02B-0236-K118 : For 12.1" LCD with touch panel
A08B-0082-K020 : For 15.0" LCD with touch panel
(2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off =
detergent for kitchen can be used)
(3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
• Replacement procedure
(1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the
touch panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface
of the touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still
left on the surface. Remove oil completely.
If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch
panel, the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel
completely and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
- 427 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Fold
OK NG
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection
sheet.
With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the
touch panel, do not attempt to correct the position of
the protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the
entire sheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of the
protection sheet do not float.
- 428 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 DCL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 DDS
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
- Calibration method
Calibration procedure
<1> Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of
parameter No. 3113 to 1.)
- 429 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
<4> Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key.
The [TP CAL] soft key is displayed.
<5> Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key causes a full-screen touch panel
calibration screen to appear.
<6> Click the 9 calibration points with a stylus pen. The marker of a
normally clicked point changes from "+" to "o". If you fail to
click right on a "+" mark, the message "Your stylus pen is not
right on a "+" mark. Click again." appears.
- 430 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- 431 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1
skipped skipped and 2 are skipped
- 432 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as indicated
below.
Setting
Indication Meaning of setting
position
Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this position at
0 0 the time of shipment from FANUC.
This setting is not skipped an expansion module.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
1 -
when the one preceding expansion module is skipped.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
2 2
when the two preceding expansion modules are skipped.
3 - Setting prohibited
4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.
4, -, 6, -,
5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
4 to F 8, -, A, -,
6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
C, -, E, -,
7, B, or F has the effect of 3. (← setting prohibited)
Examples of setting
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
module 3.
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
to setting position = 2.
Basic module
- 433 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
This function was not available initially, but was recently added. This
function became available, depending on the type of module, as
indicated below.
NOTE
To expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with a
manual pulse generator interface)
(A03B-0815-C002), a rotary switch is added as the
other modules are modified. However, expansion
module A is always installed at the location of
expansion module 1, so that the setting of
expansion module A need not be changed.
- 434 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1
skipped skipped and 2 are skipped
Standard setting
Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as indicated
below.
Setting
Indication Meaning of setting
position
Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this position at
0 0 the time of shipment from FANUC.
This setting is not skipped an expansion module.
If an expansion module is skipped, make this setting for the
1 -
one that would follow the skipped expansion module.
- 435 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Setting
Indication Meaning of setting
position
If two expansion module are skipped, make this setting for
2 2 the one that would follow the second of the skipped
expansion modules.
3 - Setting prohibited
4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.
4, -, 6, -,
5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
4 to F 8, -, A, -,
6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
C, -, E, -,
7, B, or F has the effect of 3. (← setting prohibited)
Expansion module 2
module 3.
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
to setting position = 2.
Basic module
NOTE
The expansion module A (A03B-0823-C002 with
manual Pulsecoder I/F) is always installed in a
location for expansion module 1, the setting need
not be changed.
- 436 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
WARNING
Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of
the blown fuse must be corrected. So, fuse
replacement work must be done only by a person
who is trained in the related maintenance and
safety requirements. When opening the cabinet
and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch
the high-voltage circuits (marked with and fitted
with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered
high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.
For the specification of the fuse of each unit, see the list of
consumables in Appendix B, “LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS.”
- 437 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Fuse
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Cable for the I/O Link (A03B-0815-C001)
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.
- 438 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Inter-module connection
flat cable
Basic module
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.
- 439 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
I/O connector
JD1A
JD1B
JA3
Fuse
Power supply connector
This drawing is for A20B-2002-0470, A20B-2002-0520, and A20B-2002-
0521.
Power supply
connector
Optical
Fuse connector
- 440 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
LED
Setting switch
Fuse
7-segment LED
AS-i
block
Terminal
JD1A JD1B
- 441 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Fuse
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.
- 442 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Fuse
Power supply connector
Cover
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.
- 443 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
The control units and various peripheral units supplied from FANUC
are designed assuming that those units are accommodated in enclosed
cabinets. The cabinets mentioned here include:
Display LCD-mounted
Display
type control unit and
Condition stand-alone type
display unit (excluding
control unit
units with a data server)
Operating 0 °C to 58 °C 0 °C to 55 °C
Ambient Storage and
-20 °C to 60 °C
temperature transportation
of units Change in
0.3 °C/minute max.
temperature
Relative humidity: 75% or less
Normal
No condensation
Humidity
Short term (not Relative humidity: 95% or less
exceeding 1 month) No condensation
0.5 G or less
The evaluation test is performed under the
following conditions.
10 to 58Hz : 0.075 mm (amplitude)
Operating
Vibration 58 to 500Hz : 1 G
Direction of vibration: Each of X, Y, and Z
Sweep frequency: 10 cycles
The test conforms to IEC60068–2–6.
Non-operating 1.0 G or less
Height above Operating Up to 1000m (Note)
sea level Non-operating Up to 12000m
The control units shall be kept from direct
Atmosphere exposure to coolant, lubricant, and chippings.
There shall be no corrosive gas.
- 444 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
NOTE
When the CNC is installed at a height of more than
1000 m above the sear level, a restriction is
imposed on the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC inside the cabinet.
For every 100 m rise from 1000 m above the sea
level, decrease the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC by 1.0°C.
Example:
The maximum allowable ambient temperature for
the CNC inside the cabinet installed at a height of
1750 m above the sea level is determined as
follows:
55°C - 1750/100 × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
So, the allowable ambient temperature range is
0°C to 47.5°C.
When a hard disk is used, the following restrictions
are imposed on the height of installation:
Height above the sea level for operation:
-60 m to 3000 m
Height above the sea level for non-operation:
-60 m to 12000 m
- 445 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
5.11.1 Grounding
Grounding the power magnetics cabinet and devices is very important
to prevent an electric shock and suppress a noise influence. The
following describes the grounding methods for suppressing the noise
influence.
- 446 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
NOTE
Impedance includes a resistance component that
converts electric current to heat as well as a
component called "reactance", and indicates a
characteristic of resistance to the flow of
alternating current at a certain frequency.
- 447 -
Servo unit
24V power
supply Operator’s panel
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- 448 -
AC input Connection at low
impedance Pendant box
(Low-impedance metal plates)
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
Signal line
Power
line
Cabinet
(Low-impedance metal plates) Machine side
- 449 -
AC input
Signal system ground bar
Signal line
Power
Signal system ground bar line
Machine side
Grand bar
Cable
Clamp
40mm-80mm
- 450 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Mounting plate
of the machine
Control unit
Ground plate
Clamp
Shield cover
Ground terminal
(to be connected to
ground)
Mounting hole
- 451 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Ground plate
8mm
12
mm
20mm
Up to 55mm
28mm
6
mm
17mm
- 452 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
5.11.1.4 Cabinet
A cabinet is an important element in improving noise immunity and
suppressing radiated noise. One of the causes of problems related to
noise immunity and radiated noise is faulty electrical continuity
between the metal plates that make up the cabinet. Typically, noise
that becomes a problem is high-frequency noise, against which
measures must be taken in the cabinet design.
Bead welding Bring the metal plates into direct contact with each
other, without applying a coating to their joint areas.
NOTE
For improved noise immunity, how to provide
low-impedance electrical continuity in the cabinet is
described here. To construct a protective circuit, a
protective grounding connection must be made
between the metal plates by using electric wires with a
cross-sectional area appropriate for the AC input power
capacity of the unit mounted on each metal plate.
- 453 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
<Good example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit
<Bad example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit
- 454 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Note that for each FANUC CNC, the 0V output in the CNC is
connected to a protective circuit (ground).
Machine
24 VDC power
Power supply
magnetics
Output
cabinet
signal
Relay
NC ground terminal
Machine protective circuit (ground) network
This bold line indicates grounding for the control unit described in the connection manual.
As shown in this figure, by just connecting the ground terminal of the control unit to the machine ground,
the 0 V output of the relay circuit in the power magnetics cabinet is connected to the ground (protective
circuit).
- 455 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Connect the 0-V line in the control unit with the ground plate of the
cabinet or a nearby plate via the protective grounding terminal (see
above figure).
- 456 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Signal ground
terminal (Faston
terminal)
Ground cable
2
2 mm or more Grounding plate of
the cabinet
PE
Connect the 0-V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to
the ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B-0166-K330).
- 457 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
NOTE
1 Binding the cables in one group separately from
another means that the groups are placed 10 cm or
more apart from one another.
2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield
means that shielding is provided between groups
with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between
the CNC and MDI is no more than 30 cm in length.
- 458 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Section of duct
Group A Groups B, C
Cover
- 459 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
Spark killer
AC
relay
Motor
Spark killer
NOTE
Use a CR-type noise suppressor. A varistor-type
noise suppressor is useful in clamping the peak
pulse voltage, but cannot suppress the sudden rise
of the pulse voltage.
- 460 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
+
Diode
- 461 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to
lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the
figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an
insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an
insulating transformer is installed, surge-absorbing element 2
(between line and ground) is not required.
- 462 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Notes
(1) For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy
line must be as short as possible.
Wire Size: The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or
greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for
the connection of surge-absorbing element
1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element 2
must be 2 m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages
(1000 VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove
surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the overvoltages would
activate the element.
(3) The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a
surge voltage exceeding the capacity of the surge-absorbing
elements is applied and the surge-absorbing elements are
short-circuited.
(4) Because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1
and 2 during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be
shared by other electric devices on the machine. It can be used
with the control power supply of the servo unit power supply
module or with the power supply for the fan motor of the spindle
motor.
- 463 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
- Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from
being lost, turn on the machine power before replacing the battery.
The replacement procedure is described below. (Note: The turning-on
step is not required when the αi series servo motor or βis series servo
motor (βiS 0.4 to βiS 22) is used.)
- 464 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
NOTE
The absolute Pulsecoder of the αi/βi (βiS 0.4 to βiS
22) series servo motor is incorporated with a
backup capacitor as standard. This backup
capacitor enables an absolute position detection to
be continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no
zero point return need be performed if the time
during which servo amplifier power is kept off for
battery replacement is within 10 minutes. If battery
replacement takes 10 minutes or more, the power
must remain turned on.
CAUTION
1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch
bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be
careful not to touch any high-voltage circuits due to
the electric shock hazard.
2 Before replacing the battery, make sure the DC link
charge LED is off. Otherwise, an electric shock may
be received.
3 Be sure to use the specified battery. If another type
of battery is used, it may overheat, blow out, or
catch fire.
4 Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
5 During attachment of the battery, insert the
factory-attached protection socket into the CX5X or
CX5Y connector, whichever is not used. If the +6 V
pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may
overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute
position information in absolute Pulsecoders may
be lost.
- 465 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Screws
Cover
CAUTION
Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
- 466 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
[Attachment procedure]
(1) Remove a battery cover from the servo amplifier.
(2) Attach the battery as shown below.
(3) Re-attach the cover.
(4) Connect the connector of battery with CX5X of the servo
amplifier.
SVM
Inserting way
Cable side
Red: +6V
Connector Black: 0V
Battery
CX5X, CX5Y
Battery cover
+6V
0V
CAUTION
Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.
[Attachment procedure]
(1) In case of SVU-12 or SVU-20, remove the battery cover under
the servo amplifier grasping its left and right sides. In case of
SVU-40 or SVU-80, remove the cover attached on right side of
the servo amplifier grasping its upper and lower sides.
(2) Remove the connector of battery. (Connector CX5X or CX5Y)
(3) Replace the battery and connect the connector.
(4) Mount the battery cover.
- 467 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
Battery
Battery cover
SVU-12, SVU-20
SVU-40, SVU-80
CAUTION
1 The connector of the battery can be connected with
either of CX5X and CX5Y.
2 Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.
- Used batteries
Old batteries should be disposed as "INDUSTRIAL WASTES"
according to the regulations of the country or autonomy where your
machine has been installed.
- 468 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
The 30i series LCD units (except the 15" LCD type) and MDI units
are fastened with screws from the front surface. The screws are
covered with screw caps.
5.13.1 Detaching
Slot
- 469 -
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
5.13.2 Attaching
A B
B A
A B
NOTE
If a screw cap is lost or damaged, order spares,
using the following ordering information:
A02B-0303-K190 :
A set of 100 type-A screw caps and 100 type-B
screw caps
A02B-0303-K191 :
A set of 80 type-A screw caps and 100 type-B
screw caps
- 470 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
- 471 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
- 472 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 473 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
(Ex.1)
- 474 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
ISO 0: Output with EIA code
1: Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
NOTE
An operation example shown here assumes that
data input/ output is performed with an input/output
unit connected to the JD56A. (I/O channel = 0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output when data is output.
1: Feed is not output when data is output.
ASI (*) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1: ASCII code is used.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
- 475 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
- 476 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s are edited.
1: Programs of 9000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s are edited.
1: Programs of 8000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to
display program text.
4 Press [(OPRT)] key and press continuous menu key .
5 Input a program number to be output. To output all programs
input as:
- 477 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
<5>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output when punching out.
1: Feed is not output when punching out.
ASI 0: EIA or ISO code is used.
1: ASCII code is used.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1: No. of stop bits is 2.
<6>
0102 Specification number of I/O device
<7>
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 7: 600 11: 9600
3: 110 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
4: 150 9: 2400
6: 300 (*)10:4800
- 478 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- 479 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
- 480 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
NPE When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0: Regarded as the end of program.
(*) 1: Not regarded as the end of porgram.
RAL When programs are registered:
(*) 0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 9000s are protected.
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
* For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1 Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to
select a part program file.
4 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
- 481 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
Backup data 1
Backup data 2
Restore
Backup data 3
Explanation
- Data to be backed up
Data in the CNC is backed up by storing it in the FROM, which
requires no battery.
• NC programs and directory information held in the FROM
(which requires no battery)
• Various types of data, such as parameters and offset values, held
in the SRAM (which requires batteries)
Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No.10340 to 1 enables NC programs
and directory information in the FROM to be backed up. Set this
parameter only when necessary, because the required backup time and
data storage size vary depending on the size of the programs.
Setting parameter No. 10342 enables up to 3 occurrences of backup
data to be held.
- 482 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
- Backup modes
The following three backup modes are available.
1. Automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on
2. Automatic backup occurring at intervals of a specified number of
days when the power is turned on
3. Backup started manually at an emergency stop
[Backup procedure]
1. Put the machine in an emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 (EEB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 to start backup.
This parameter becomes 0 just after the backup sequence has
started.
3. The execution status of backup can be checked with No. 1016 on
the diagnosis screen described later.
- 483 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
NOTE
It takes time since the beginning of backup till the
end of backup. So, if data being backed up is
updated, it is likely that a mismatch may occur
between the original data and backup data. When
updating data in the CNC at an emergency stop,
watch the automatic data backup in-progress signal
ATBK and perform appropriate processing.
[Backup procedure]
1. Set bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1.
2. Turn the power for the CNC off and on again. When the power
is turned on, the first piece of backup data is updated
automatically, and bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 becomes
0.
The second and third pieces of backup data are updated each time
another type of backup (automatic backup occurring every time the
power is turned on, automatic backup occurring at intervals of a
specified number of days when the power is turned on, or backup
started manually at an emergency stop) is made.
- Parity check
A parity check is made at backup. If a parity error is detected, the
backup is not completed.
- 484 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
3. Exit BOOT.
Signal
Automatic data backup in-progress signal ATBK<F0520#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal is "1" during automatic data backup. When updating data
in the CNC at an emergency stop, perform appropriate processing
according to the state of this signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0520 ATBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10340 EEB EIB AAP ABI ABP
- 485 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
#6 EIB When the CNC is turned on next, overwrite-protected backup data is:
0: Not updated.
1: Updated.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 2 or a greater value is
set in parameter No. 10342, and bit 1 (ABI) of
parameter No. 10340 is set to 1.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 1 or a greater value is
set in parameter No. 10342.
Diagnosis display
This function enables the status of backup execution to be checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1016 ANG ACM DT3 DT2 DT1 AEX
- 486 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
#1 DT1 Indicates whether data 1 has been updated in the previous backup, as
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#2 DT2 Indicates whether data 2 has been updated in the previous backup, as
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#3 DT3 Indicates whether data 3 has been updated in the previous backup, as
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
Caution
CAUTION
1 A value that can be set in parameter No. 10342
(number of occurrences of backup data held) is
limited according to the program size, SRAM
capacity, and the FROM/SRAM module used.
2 Do not turn off the power for the NC during backup
or restoration.
3 If backed-up data is restored, parameters
submitted to automatic backup are returned to the
state in which they were when backed up.
Change them as required.
- 487 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 488 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Internal External
I/O Sequence I/O
program
- 489 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
F X Signals
Signals to/from
PMC
to/from CNC machine
G Y (MT)
Nonvolatile memory
(1) Variable timer (T)
Internal relay (R) (2) Counter (C)
(3) Keep relay (K)
(4) Data table (D)
NOTE
Optionally, extra relays (E) may be assigned to
nonvolatile memory locations.
The PMC signal address format consists of an address number and bit
number (0 to 7) as follows:
Bit number (0 to 7)
Address number (letter followed by decimal
number)
- 490 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 491 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 492 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
M0-, M0-,
N0- N0-
M0-,
N0-
- 493 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
CNC PMC
Peripheral
2nd PMC equipment,
etc.
Loader
3rd PMC Operator's
control group
panel for
loader, etc.
- 494 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Execution order
If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), the
following order sequence is assumed by default:
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
- 495 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
- 496 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527
Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
2nd PMC
Channel 3
X/Y0 to X/Y127
3rd PMC
Channel 4
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Fig. 7.2.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels
- 497 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 498 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
When using this function, the input and output signals of each path
become definitely. So, you can send or receive the data on between
two PMC paths safely.
When you output data to N address at one of PMC paths, it can be
referenced by M address in other PMC path.
Ex.) When using this function with 1st PMC and 2nd PMC :
M M
N N
- 499 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
The System Relay uses the following PMC address by each PMC
Memory Type.
NOTE
The address conversion of the System Relay is
necessary when a Sequence Program is changed
between PMC Memory-C and other PMC Memory
types.
R9000
Z0
The result is 0.
(2) R9000, Z0 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW
functional instructions)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Z0
- 500 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
System timers
Four signals can be used as system timers.
Their specifications are as follows.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
Z91
Constantly OFF signal
Constantly ON signal
R9091.5
Z91.5
104msec 96msec
200msec
R9091.6
Z91.6
504msec 496msec
1sec
CAUTION
1 Each signal is initially OFF.
2 The signals R9091.0, R9091.1, Z91.0, and Z91.1
are set at the beginning of the first ladder level on
every cycle.
3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of
±8 or 4 ms (ladder execution period).
- 501 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9015
R9091
Z91
"1st Ladder execution status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed
Signal operation
Run
Ladder execution status
Stop
- 502 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
CAUTION
Reference this signal only within a ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder
execution separately for each ladder execution
level.
- 503 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
1 Reference this signal only within the ladder
program. Do not reference it from an external
system or program as it indicates the status of
ladder execution separately for each ladder
execution level.
2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm
occurs, ladder execution and I/O signal transfer are
immediately stopped for safety purposes. In this
case, therefore, this signal cannot be used.
CNC unit
Y0.0
R9015.1
I/O Link slave
(Z15.1) Y0.0
I/O Link
- 504 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 505 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
30i/31i/32i-A PMC
Function 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC 32i-A PMC/L
1st PMC
(option) (option) (Note1)
DI/DO
• I/O Link (Note 11)
• Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024
points (Note10) points (Note10) points (Note10) points
• Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024
points (Note10) points (Note10) points (Note10) points
Symbol & Comment
(Note12)
• Number of symbol 40 40 40 40 40
characters
• Number of comment 255 255 255 255 255
characters (Note13)
Program storage area Up to 2MB Up to 768KB Up to 768KB 128KB 128KB
(Flash ROM) (Note14)
- 506 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety and handles the safety related signals.
Refer to "Series 30i/31i/32i Dual Check Safety Operators Manual (B-64004EN)" for
details.
2 There is no kind of PMC Memory Type in DCS PMC and 32i-A PMC/L.
3 The Step Sequence is unavailable in 2nd PMC and 3rd PMC even if selecting PMC
Memory-B or Common PMC Memory mode.
4 These instructions are intended to maintain source-level compatibility with programs
for other models. A program can be created on level 3, but it is not executed.
5 CNC parameter No. 11930 is used to specify a level-1 execution period. See PMC
Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details. Note, however, that it is impossible
to specify a level-1 execution period for each PMC separately.
6 It is the processing speed of Basic Instruction other than Positive/Negative transition
contact.
7 The maximum overall program size (including the maximum number of ladder steps,
symbols/ comments, and messages) varies depending on option settings. See
PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
8 For the number of functional instructions, each parenthesized number indicates the
number of all functional instructions, and each non-parenthesized number, the
number of valid functional instructions.
9 It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific CNC system.
See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
10 On series 30i, you can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and
4,096 output points). On series 31i/32i, you can use up to three I/O Link channels
(3,072 input points and 3,072 output points). The channel number 1 of I/O Link
(1,024 input points and 1,024 output points) is a basic function. The channel number
2 to 4 are optional function. To use more than one channel of I/O Link, the "I/O Link
expansion" option is necessary for each I/O Link channel.
It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific I/O Link channel.
See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
11 The update cycle of the signals from I/O Link depends on the combination with each
PMC and each I/O Link channel. See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for
details.
12 These are the number for extended symbol and comment character. The number of
basic symbol character is 16 and the number of comment character is 30. See PMC
Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
13 This number is the number of single-byte characters. When you use double-byte
characters as a comment, the number becomes half.
14 The capacity of the program storage area varies depending on option settings. See
PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
- 507 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 508 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety
Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details.
2 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another
way, its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs. And, it can be used as
nonvolatile memory by option (except PMC/L).
3 No extra relay is available for DCS PMC.
4 The message display relay is ineffective in DCS PMC because the message display
function is unavailable in it.
5 This area is used to specify the precision of the variable timer. Do not use this
area in user programs.
6 To use all of data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-B in 2nd
PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (7KB)" option. If
this option is not added, the expanded data table area (D3000 to D9999) is not kept
after rebooting CNC.
7 To use all of data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-C in 1st
PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (10KB)" option. If
this option is not added, the expanded data table area (D10000 to D19999) is not
kept after rebooting CNC.
- 509 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
7.3.2 Addresses
Table 7.3.2 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A PMC
1st, 2nd and 3rd PMC DCS PMC
Signals Symbol 32i-A PMC/L
PMC
PMC Memory-B PMC Memory-C (Note 1)
Memory-A
Input signal to X X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127
the PMC from X200 ~ X327 X200 ~ X327 X200 ~ X327
the machine X400 ~ X527 X400 ~ X527 X400 ~ X527
X600 ~ X727 X600 ~ X727 X600 ~ X727
X1000 ~ X1127 X1000 ~ X1127 X1000 ~ X1127
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
Output signal Y Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127
from the PMC Y200 ~ Y327 Y200 ~ Y327 Y200 ~ Y327
to the machine Y400 ~ Y527 Y400 ~ Y527 Y400 ~ Y527
Y600 ~ Y727 Y600 ~ Y727 Y600 ~ Y727
Y1000 ~ Y1127 Y1000 ~ Y1127 Y1000 ~ Y1127
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
Input signal to F F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767
the PMC from F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767
the CNC F2000 ~ F2767 F2000 ~ F2767 F2000 ~ F2767
F3000 ~ F3767 F3000 ~ F3767 F3000 ~ F3767
F4000 ~ F4767 F4000 ~ F4767 F4000 ~ F4767
F5000 ~ F5767 F5000 ~ F5767 F5000 ~ F5767
F6000 ~ F6767 F6000 ~ F6767 F6000 ~ F6767
F7000 ~ F7767 F7000 ~ F7767 F7000 ~ F7767
F8000 ~ F8767 F8000 ~ F8767 F8000 ~ F8767
F9000 ~ F9767 F9000 ~ F9767 F9000 ~ F9767
Output signal G G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767
from the PMC G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767
to the CNC G2000 ~ G2767 G2000 ~ G2767 G2000 ~ G2767
G3000 ~ G3767 G3000 ~ G3767 G3000 ~ G3767
G4000 ~ G4767 G4000 ~ G4767 G4000 ~ G4767
G5000 ~ G5767 G5000 ~ G5767 G5000 ~ G5767
G6000 ~ G6767 G6000 ~ G6767 G6000 ~ G6767
G7000 ~ G7767 G7000 ~ G7767 G7000 ~ G7767
G8000 ~ G8767 G8000 ~ G8767 G8000 ~ G8767
G9000 ~ G9767 G9000 ~ G9767 G9000 ~ G9767
Input signal M M0 ~ M767 M0 ~ M767 M0 ~ M767
from other
PMC path
Output signal N N0 ~ N767 N0 ~ N767 N0 ~ N767
to other PMC
path
Internal relay R R0 ~ R1499 R0 ~ R7999 R0 ~ R15999 R0 ~ R1499 R0 ~ R1499
System relay R/Z R9000 ~ R9499 R9000 ~ R9499 Z0 ~ Z499 R9000 ~ R9499 R9000 ~ R9499
Extra relay E E0 ~ E9999 E0 ~ E9999 E0 ~ E9999 (Note 5) E0 ~ E9999
(Note 4) (Note 4) (Note 4)
- 510 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety
Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details.
2 This area is reserved for PMC management software. No I/O can be allocated in
this area. Do not use it in user programs.
3 This area is used to specify the precision of a variable timer.
- Don't modify the value of timer and precision except for writing same value when
working the timer.
- Don't set the value other than the following range.
- If above rules are violated, the working of the timer is not guaranteed.
- Other than the range from T9000 to T9999 are reserved.
4 This area is common memory for the multi-path PMC function. It is possible for
each program to read the same value from, and write it to, the area.
5 No extra relay is available for the Dual Check Safety PMC.
- 511 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Return key
- 512 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 513 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
SYSTEM
I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Subsection 7.5.8.)
<
PMC ALARM PMC alarm screen (See Subsection 7.5.2.)
SYSTEM PARAM
System parameter display/editing
screen
- 514 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Table contents
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• 0 to 7: Data at each bit position
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
• DEC: Display of each byte in decimal
Operation procedure
(1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the
[SEARCH] soft key.
- 515 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
(3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bit pattern.
(4) To display the data at another address, press the cursor keys,
page keys, or [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) To modify the status of a signal, switch to the forced I/O screen
by pressing the [FORCE] soft key.
NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed and usable
when the forced I/O function is enabled. For details,
see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching
- 516 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Page display
In the alarm message display area, an alarm message output from the
PMC is displayed. When many alarm messages are output to two or
more pages, the page keys can be used to switch from one page to
another.
In the page display area to the right of the title, the number of the page
currently displaying messages is indicated.
- 517 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Page display
Comment display
area
- 518 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Table contents
• NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction
timer.
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Timer setting value
• ACC: Timer accuracy
• COMMENT: T address comment
In the PRESET column, timer setting values are displayed. When the
timer accuracy is 8, 48, 1, 10, or 100 ms, only a numeric value is
displayed. When the timer accuracy is the second or minute, a time
value is displayed using H, M, and S with the separator "_" used to
delimit one unit from another as follows:
aaH_bbM_ccS
In the ACC column, timer accuracy values are displayed. The table
below indicates the time setting values and notation of each accuracy
value.
- 519 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Page display
Comment display
area
- 520 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Table contents
• NO.: Counter number specified for a functional
instruction counter
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value
is specified by a counter instruction)
• CURRENT: Current counter value
• COMMENT: Comment on the C address of a setting value
- 521 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Page display
CAUTION
If the area for the PMC management software is
protected by the programmer protection function,
the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY
screen. For details, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL
A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
- 522 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Page display
Comment
display area
- 523 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Table contents
• GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data table
• NO.: Group number
• ADDRESS: Data table start address
• PARAMETER: Data table control parameter
• TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3
= bit)
• DATA: Number of data items in each data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the start D address of each group
NOTE
The data table control parameters have the following meanings:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0: Binary format
1: BCD format (Bits 2 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Without input protection
1: With input protection
0: Binary or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid.)
1: Hexadecimal format (Bits 0 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Signed (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
1: Unsigned (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
NOTE
1 When data table control data is protected by the
programmer protection function, the data table
control data screen is not displayed. For details,
see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
2 When PMC parameters are output using the I/O
screen (see Subsection 7.5.7, “Data Input/Output
([I/O] Screen)”), only the data of an address D area
set in the data table control data is output from the
data table screen. The data of an address D area
not set in the data table control data is not output.
- 524 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting
Input of the number Symbol display Switching to the soft keys for data size
of groups switching setting
- 525 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Page display
- 526 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
The group information line at the top of the screen displays a group
number, group start address, settings, and comment on the start
address.
- 527 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 528 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Cancellation
- 529 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Channel number
I/O Unit type
- 530 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
CAUTION
1 IDs other than those for the I/O units listed in Table
7.5 represent undefined units.
2 I/O Units not for this CNC are written in Table 7.5.
Soft keys
- 531 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
NOTE
For the setting to automatically start the trace
function after the power is turned on, see
Subsection 7.5.11.2.
- 532 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 533 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Trigger position
← 1 sec →← 9 sec →
- 534 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 535 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 536 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 7.2.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keyboard, use “;” or “/”.
3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety
cannot be traced.
4 Increasing the number of the signal address
changes the capacity of "SAMPLING/ TIME" or
"SAMPLING/ FRAME" in page 1. If the capacity is
changed, the following warning message is
displayed. (The "n" on the message means the
maximum value that is able to input.)
a) In case of "TIME CYCLE" mode
"SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC."
b) In case of "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode
"SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n."
b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the setting screen of sampling address are as follows
• DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the
cursor.
• SYMBOL/ Changes the address display to the symbol
ADDRESS:
display. However, display of the address
that is not defined the symbol does not
change. This soft key also changes to
"ADDRESS". The following soft keys are
displayed.
• MOVE UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal above one line.
• MOVE DOWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal below one line.
• DELETE ALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.
c) Trigger setting
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE" and
"ANY CHANGE" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", it can
be set whether to use the setting address as the signals that should
trigger the sampling in the setting signals. As for the signal
address where the trigger was set, "9" is displayed right. Soft
keys on the Trigger setting screen are as follows:
• TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
• TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.
- 537 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 538 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 539 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
a) Scroll of screen
• Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
• Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [<< PREV] soft
key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range
Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor.
If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the
current position cursor has priority of display. The "MARK
POSITION" that shows the position of the mark cursor and
"RANGE" that shows the range between the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values. Pushing
[MARK] again releases the select range mode.
- 540 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
For details of the method of setting PMC setting
data, see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-63983EN).
- 541 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Listing order
Additional information
GRP (GROUP)
To include a specific string which means a kind of signals in a part of
symbol string, these signals on I/O diagnosis screen are classified and
you can easy to understand the status of signals.
The group names of the I/O variables are displayed, which are
extracted (Max. 4 chars) out of their symbol names as configured in
“GROUP FORMAT” in the setting screen.
The groups to be displayed can be specified by soft key.
[ALL GROUPS] All groups are displayed.
[GROUP] The group entered by key or the group under the
cursor is selected to be displayed.
PROG.SYMBOL (SYMBOL)
The symbol names of the I/O variables are displayed.
ADDRESS
The actual locations of I/O variables are displayed.
VALUE
The current values of I/O variables are displayed as signed decimal,
according to the data type of them (i.e. BOOL, BYTE, WORD, and
DWORD).
- 542 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
I/O INFORMATION
The information related to I/O network is displayed in the display
format below:
I/O type:
Module type Shown as
Input module I
Output module O
Other *
Network type:
Network type Shown as
PROFIBUS P
I/O LINK Ln (n: channel number)
Network address:
Network type Network address notation
PROFIBUS <Slave #>.<Slot #>
I/O LINK <Group #>.<Base #>.<Slot #>
NOTE
This screen shows the I/O information according to the
network setting that became effective at the time of the
last power-on.
The notes for each network device are as follows:
PROFIBUS
1. If you have changed some of the profibus parameters,
you have to cycle the power once to make the changes
take effect.
I/O LINK
1. Only the I/O Link assingments, which are made
effective by the setting of “Machine Signal Interface” in
Configuration Parameter menu and the setting of
“Selectable I/O Link Assignment Function”, are
displayed.
2. If you have changed the following parameters, you have
to cycle the power once to make them take effect:
• “I/O module assignment data”
• “Machine signal interface” in PMC configuration
parameter
• “Selectable I/O Link assignment function”
3. If you have stored new sequence program to PMC, its
I/O Link assignment data will not take effect until you
write it into Flash-ROM and cycle the power once.
- 543 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
REMARK
The remarks up to 8 characters extracted from comment data are
displayed. To specify the remark at this field, set “100” to the
attribute value of the comment, which you want to show in this field,
on FANUC LADDER-III,
Attribute value: 0 to 15
0: English 9: Danish
1: Japanese 10: Portuguese
2: German 11: Polish
3: French 12: Hungarian
4: Chinese (Traditional) 13: Swedish
5: Italian 14: Czech
6: Korean 15: Chinese (Simplified)
7: Spanish 16: Russian
8: Dutch 17: Turkish
NOTE
In case of the extended symbol and comment, the
comments on the screen will be switched
dynamically another language when the language
setting of CNC changes.
Soft key
Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen
Search for data Switch to the address order display Switch to the specified group display
Switch to the address order display Switch PMC path Screen settings
Switch to the address order display Switch to the all group display
- 544 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
SYSTEM
- 545 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
NOTE
You can protect these screens by using the
programmer protection function. For details, see
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL.
You can change between screens as shown in the figure below.
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
MONITOR screen VIEWER screen
[LIST]
Display function
(monitor)
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
Edit function EDITOR screen EDITOR screen
[LIST]
NOTE
The [EDIT] soft key on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen is displayed so that it is available if
the programmer protection function is enabled. While
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. (To
stop the online monitor function, change the settings
of "RS-232C" and "HIGH SPEED" to "NOT USE".
- 546 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
SP area
Size area
- 547 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 548 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 549 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
(3) Monitor
(a) Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors
according to the status of the signal. The status of power
flow is not displayed.
(b) Usually, the parameters of functional instructions are
monitored and displayed. You can suppress the monitor and
display by an appropriate setting. For details, see PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
- 550 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 551 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 552 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
CAUTION
1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether
they are active or not. To execute a ladder program
with the results of editing being reflected, you must
update the ladder program. To do this, click the
[UPDATE] soft key, or update the program when
exiting from the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. For details of the method of protecting
editing, see “PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-63983EN).”
2 After you have edited a sequence program, the
results of editing will be lost if the power is turned off
without first writing the edited sequence program to
flash ROM.
Write the sequence program to flash ROM on the
I/O screen. If you set "WRITE TO F-ROM(EDIT)" to
"YES" on the general functions' setting parameter
screen, a confirmation message will be displayed,
prompting you to ask whether to write a sequence
program to flash ROM after the end of editing. For
details of this setting, see “PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL (B-63983EN).”
- 553 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Program List
Change to Search soft keys Select net Copy net
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in
wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine. You have to make it sure
that modifications you make on LADDER program is
appropriate, machine is in proper status, and nobody
is near the machine, when you update LADDER
program.
- 554 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 555 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit
- 556 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 557 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 558 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
- 559 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- 560 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fig. 7.6.5 (d) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen (search soft keys)
- 561 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
G0000~ X000~
Path 2 F1000~
G2000~
Path 3
F2000~
- 562 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
G3000~ G3000~
Path 4 F3000~ F3000~
G4000~ G4000~
Path 5 F4000~ F4000~
G5000~ G0000~
Path 6 F5000~ F0000~ X000~
Second I/O device
G6000~ G1000~ PMC for second
Y000~
machine
Path 7
F6000~ F1000~
Second
machine
group G7000~ G2000~
Path 8 F7000~ F2000~
G8000~ G3000~
Path 9 F8000~ F3000~
X000~
G9000~ G0000~
Third Third I/O device
machine Path 10 F9000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for third
group machine
NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an
independent signal area. The F, G, X, and Y signal
addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other
hand, the F and G signal addresses from the
viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses
used in programming of each ladder are different
from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.
- 563 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both lathe system and machining center system are
described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal
address figure as shown below. This means either lathe system or
machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for
lathe system and lower part is for machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON
M series
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the lathe
system while the other signals for both the lathe system and
machining system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 1]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for machining center system only.
- 564 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
NOTE
1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal is
*ESP<X008.4>, *ESP<X008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively.
2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of
a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1 on PMC side) : #1
- Path type (for path 2 on PMC side) : #2
- Path type (for path 3 on PMC side) : #3
#1 to #3 represent signals prepared exclusively for, respectively, paths 1 to 3 on the
PMC side.
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP
For the G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, and #SP represent signals
prepared exclusively for, respectively, each path, controlled axis, and spindle on the
CNC side.
- PMC axis control group type : #PX
#PX represents signals prepared for each PMC axis control group.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used in
each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
: :
10th path : n=9 (No. 9000 to 9999)
5 If more than eight axes per path are used with controlled axis type signals, use
parameter No. 3021 to take an appropriate measure.
6 If more than four axes per path are used with spindle type signals, use parameter
No. 3022 to take an appropriate measure.
- 565 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
MT → CNC
X001
X002
X003
X005
X006
X007 *DEC8
#2
*DEC7
#2
*DEC6
#2
*DEC5
#2
*DEC4
#2
*DEC3
#2
*DEC2
#2
*DEC1
#2
X009 *DEC8
#1
*DEC7
#1
*DEC6
#1
*DEC5
#1
*DEC4
#1
*DEC3
#1
*DEC2
#1
*DEC1
#1
X010 *DEC8
#3
*DEC7
#3
*DEC6
#3
*DEC5
#3
*DEC4
#3
*DEC3
#3
*DEC2
#3
*DEC1
#3
X012
- 566 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
PMC → CNC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0#P
Gn003
Gn007 RLSOT
#P
EXLM#P *FLWU
#P
RLSOT3#P ST#P STLK#P RVS#P
Gn015
Gn016
F1D#P
Gn017
- 567 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn022
#P
Gn023 ALNGH
#P
RGHTH HREV#P HNDLF
#P
Gn035 SIND2
#SP
SSIN2
#SP
SGN2
#SP
R12I2#SP R11I2#SP R10I2#SP R09I2#SP
Gn037 SIND3
#SP
SSIN3
#SP
SGN3
#SP
R12I3#SP R11I3#SP R10I3#SP R09I3#SP
- 568 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn048 TLRST
#P
TLRSTI
#P
TLSKP
#P
LFCIV#P TL512#P TL256#P
Gn051
*CHLD#P CHPST
#P
*CHP8#P *CHP4#P *CHP2#P *CHP1#P
Gn052
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024
#P
Gn060 *TSB
Gn063 NMWT
#P
NOZAGC#P SLSPB
#P
SLSPA
#P
NOWT HEAD
INFD#P
- 569 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
MLTC#P
Gn067 HCREQ HCABT MCHK#P MMOD#P CGREN
#P
Gn071 RCHA
#SP
RSLA#SP INTGA
#SP
SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA
#SP
ARSTA#SP
Gn075 RCHB
#SP
RSLB#SP INTGB
#SP
SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB
#SP
ARSTB#SP
Gn084
Gn085
- 570 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn089
#P
G2SLC G2Y#P G2Z#P G2X#P G2RVY
#P
G2RVZ
#P
G2RVX
#P
Gn090
Gn091
Gn092
Gn093
Gn094
Gn095
Gn097
Gn099
Gn104 +EXL8
#SV
+EXL7
#SV
+EXL6
#SV
+EXL5
#SV
+EXL4
#SV
+EXL3
#SV
+EXL2
#SV
+EXL1
#SV
Gn105 -EXL8
#SV
-EXL7
#SV
-EXL6
#SV
-EXL5
#SV
-EXL4
#SV
-EXL3
#SV
-EXL2
#SV
-EXL1
#SV
- 571 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn111
Gn113
Gn115
Gn117
Gn118 *+ED8
#SV
*+ED7
#SV
*+ED6
#SV
*+ED5
#SV
*+ED4
#SV
*+ED3
#SV
*+ED2
#SV
*+ED1
#SV
Gn119
Gn121
Gn123
Gn127
Gn129
- 572 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn133
Gn135
Gn137
Gn139
Gn141
Gn144 EIF7A
#PX
EIF6A
#PX
EIF5A
#PX
EIF4A
#PX
EIF3A
#PX
EIF2A
#PX
EIF1A
#PX
EIF0A
#PX
Gn146 EID7A
#PX
EID6A
#PX
EID5A
#PX
EID4A
#PX
EID3A
#PX
EID2A
#PX
EID1A
#PX
EID0A
#PX
Gn152
- 573 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn156 EIF7B
#PX
EIF6B
#PX
EIF5B
#PX
EIF4B
#PX
EIF3B
#PX
EIF2B
#PX
EIF1B
#PX
EIF0B
#PX
Gn158 EID7B
#PX
EID6B
#PX
EID5B
#PX
EID4B
#PX
EID3B
#PX
EID2B
#PX
EID1B
#PX
EID0B
#PX
Gn162 EOVCB#PX
Gn164
Gn165
Gn168 EIF7C
#PX
EIF6C
#PX
EIF5C
#PX
EIF4C
#PX
EIF3C
#PX
EIF2C
#PX
EIF1C
#PX
EIF0C
#PX
Gn170 EID7C
#PX
EID6C
#PX
EID5C
#PX
EID4C
#PX
EID3C
#PX
EID2C
#PX
EID1C
#PX
EID0C
#PX
Gn174 EOVCC#PX
- 574 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn176
Gn177
Gn180 EIF7D
#PX
EIF6D
#PX
EIF5D
#PX
EIF4D
#PX
EIF3D
#PX
EIF2D
#PX
EIF1D
#PX
EIF0D
#PX
Gn182 EID7D
#PX
EID6D
#PX
EID5D
#PX
EID4D
#PX
EID3D
#PX
EID2D
#PX
EID1D
#PX
EID0D
#PX
Gn186 EOVCD#PX
Gn188
Gn189
Gn191
Gn193 HDSR#P
Gn194
Gn195
Gn196 *DEC8
#SV
*DEC7
#SV
*DEC6
#SV
*DEC5
#SV
*DEC4
#SV
*DEC3
#SV
*DEC2
#SV
*DEC1
#SV
- 575 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn198
Gn201
#SP
Gn205 RCHC
#SP
RSLC INTGC
#SP
SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP
OVRIDC#S
Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP P DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC
#SP
#SP
Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC MORCMC#SP
Gn212
Gn213
Gn214
Gn215
Gn216
Gn217
Gn220 *CGROV7
#P
*CGROV6
#P
*CGROV5
#P
*CGROV4
#P
*CGROV3
#P
*CGROV2
#P
*CGROV1
#P
*CGROV0
#P
Gn251 LCBS
- 576 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn267 RCHD
#SP
RSLD#SP INTGD
#SP
SOCND#SP MCFND#SP SPSLD#SP *ESPD#SP ARSTD#SP
OVRIDD#S
Gn268 RCHHGD#SP MFNHGD#SP INCMDD#SP P DEFMDD#SP NRROD#SP ROTAD#SP INDXD#SP
MORC
Gn269 MPOFD
#SP
SLVD#SP #SP
MD
Gn273 SIND4
#SP
SSIN4
#SP
SGN4
#SP
R12I4#SP R11I4#SP R10I4#SP R09I4#SP
Gn275
- 577 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn290 PGCK#P
Gn291
Gn293
Gn294
Gn297 AOFS2
#P
AOFS1
#P
CHGAO#P BCAN#P
Gn299
Gn300
Gn301
Gn302
Gn303
Gn304
Gn305
Gn306
- 578 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Gn308
Gn309
Gn310
Gn311
Gn312
Gn313
Gn314
Gn315
Gn316
Gn317
Gn318
Gn319
Gn320
Gn321
Gn322
Gn323
Gn324
Gn325
Gn326
Gn327
Gn328 TLRSTI4
#P
TLRSTI3
#P
TLRSTI2
#P
TLRSTI1
#P
TLRST4
#P
TLRST3
#P
TLRST2
#P
TLRST1
#P
- 579 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Gn331
Gn332
Gn333
Gn334
Gn335
Gn336
Gn337
Gn338
Gn339
Gn340
Gn341 *+ED48
#SV
*+ED47
#SV
*+ED46
#SV
*+ED45
#SV
*+ED44
#SV
*+ED43
#SV
*+ED42
#SV
*+ED41
#SV
Gn342 *-ED48
#SV
*-ED47
#SV
*-ED46
#SV
*-ED45
#SV
*-ED44
#SV
*-ED43
#SV
*-ED42
#SV
*-ED41
#SV
Gn343 *+ED58
#SV
*+ED57
#SV
*+ED56
#SV
*+ED55
#SV
*+ED54
#SV
*+ED53
#SV
*+ED52
#SV
*+ED51
#SV
Gn344 *-ED58
#SV
*-ED57
#SV
*-ED56
#SV
*-ED55
#SV
*-ED54
#SV
*-ED53
#SV
*-ED52
#SV
*-ED51
#SV
Gn345
Gn346
Gn348
Gn349
Gn350
- 580 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn351
Gn354 THD07
#P
THD06
#P
THD05
#P
THD04
#P
THD03
#P
THD02
#P
THD01
#P
THD00
#P
Gn355 THD15
#P
THD14
#P
THD13
#P
THD12
#P
THD11
#P
THD10
#P
THD09
#P
THD08
#P
Gn356 THSTB
#P
THML
#P
Gn357
to
Gn375
Gn381
Gn382
Gn383
Gn384
Gn385
Gn386
Gn387
Gn388
- 581 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn389
Gn390
Gn391
Gn392
Gn393
Gn394
Gn395
Gn396
Gn397
Gn398
Gn399
Gn404
Gn405
ITF10#P ITF09#P
Gn407 ITCD6 ITCD5 ITCD4
Gn409
Gn410
- 582 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn411 HS4IE
#P
HS3IE
#P
HS2IE
#P
HS1IE
#P
HS4E
#P
HS3E
#S
HS2E
#P
HS1E
#P
Gn412 HS5IE
#P
HS5E
#P
to
Gn512 MCST8
#P
MCST7
#P
MCST6
#P
MCST5
#P
MCST4
#P
MCST3
#P
MCST2
#P
MCST1
#P
Gn514 MCFIN#P
Gn515 PPK8
#SV
PPK7
#SV
PPK6
#SV
PPK5
#SV
PPK4
#SV
PPK3
#SV
PPK2
#SV
PPK1
#SV
Gn516 SEMI8 #SV SEMI7#SV SEMI6#SV SEMI5#SV SEMI4#SV SEMI3#SV SEMI2#SV SEMI1#SV
#P #P
Gn517 GAE3
#P GAE2 GAE1
Gn518 BOV
#P
Gn519 TSE#P
Gn520
Gn522
Gn524
to
Gn531 HBTRN
#P
MRVM
#P
FWSTP
#P
Gn532
- 583 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn533 SSRS #P
SSR4 #SP
SSR3 #SP
SSR2 #SP
SSR1#SP
Gn535
Gn536 SPSP#P
to
Gn544 MHLC5
#P
MHLC4
#P
MHLC3
#P
MHLC2
#P
MHLC1
#P
Gn545 MHUS5
#P
MHUS4
#P
MHUS3
#P
MHUS2
#P
MHUS1
#P
Gn546
Gn547
to
Gn767
- 584 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
CNC → PMC
Fn005 MBDT9
#P
MBDT8
#P
MBDT7
#P
MBDT6
#P
MBDT5
#P
MBDT4
#P
MBDT3
#P
MBDT2
#P
Fn018
Fn019
Fn020
- 585 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn035 SPAL#P
Fn042
- 586 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn044 SYCAL
#P
FSPPH
#P
FSPSY
#P
FSCSL
#P
Fn048 CSPENA#SP
Fn052 CSPENB#SP
Fn054 UO007
#P
UO006#P UO005
#P
UO004
#P
UO003
#P
UO002
#P
UO001
#P
UO000
#P
Fn055 UO015
#P
UO014#P UO013
#P
UO012
#P
UO011
#P
UO010
#P
UO009
#P
UO008
#P
Fn056 UO107
#P
UO106#P UO105
#P
UO104
#P
UO103
#P
UO102
#P
UO101
#P
UO100
#P
Fn057 UO115
#P
UO114#P UO113
#P
UO112
#P
UO111
#P
UO110
#P
UO109
#P
UO108
#P
Fn058 UO123
#P
UO122#P UO121
#P
UO120
#P
UO119
#P
UO118
#P
UO117
#P
UO116
#P
Fn059 UO131
#P
UO130#P UO129
#P
UO128
#P
UO127
#P
UO126
#P
UO125
#P
UO124
#P
#P
MTLA MTLANG#P
Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2 BCLP
#P
BUCLP
#P
#P #P
S2MES S1MES
Fn062 PRTSF
#P
D3ROT
#P
HSRA
#P
AICC#P
#P #P
TIALM TICHK
Fn064 COSP#P TLCHB
#P
TLCHI
#P
TLNW
#P
TLCH
#P
- 587 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
#P
Fn066 #P FEED0 RTPT#P
PECK2
Fn067
Fn068
Fn069
Fn070 PSW08
#P
PSW07
#P
PSW06
#P
PSW05
#P
PSW04
#P
PSW03
#P
PSW02
#P
PSW01
#P
Fn071 PSW16
#P
PSW15
#P
PSW14
#P
PSW13
#P
PSW12
#P
PSW11
#P
PSW10
#P
PSW09
#P
Fn074 OUT15
#P
OUT14
#P
OUT13
#P
OUT12
#P
OUT11
#P
OUT10
#P
OUT9#P OUT8#P
Fn076 ROV2O
#P
ROV1O
#P
RTAP#P MP2O#P MP1O#P
Fn080 *JV15O
#P
*JV14O
#P
*JV13O
#P
*JV12O
#P
*JV11O
#P
*JV10O
#P
*JV9O#P *JV8O#P
Fn083
Fn084 EUO07
#P
EUO06
#P
EUO05
#P
EUO04
#P
EUO03
#P
EUO02
#P
EUO01
#P
EUO00
#P
Fn085 EUO15
#P
EUO14
#P
EUO13
#P
EUO12
#P
EUO11
#P
EUO10
#P
EUO09
#P
EUO08
#P
Fn086
- 588 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn088
Fn089
Fn092 HSBIN
#P
TRSPS
#P
TRMTN
#P
TRACT
#P
Fn095
Fn097
Fn099
Fn101
Fn103
Fn105
Fn106 MVD8
#SV
MVD7
#SV
MVD6
#SV
MVD5
#SV
MVD4
#SV
MVD3
#SV
MVD2
#SV
MVD1
#SV
Fn107
- 589 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn111
Fn113
Fn114 TRQL8
#SV
TRQL7
#SV
TRQL6
#SV
TRQL5
#SV
TRQL4
#SV
TRQL3
#SV
TRQL2
#SV
TRQL1
#SV
Fn115
Fn117
Fn118 SYN80
#SV
SYN70
#SV
SYN60
#SV
SYN50
#SV
SYN40
#SV
SYN30
#SV
SYN20
#SV
SYN10
#SV
Fn119
Fn121
Fn123
Fn125
Fn127
Fn128
Fn129 *EAXSL
#P
EOV0#P
- 590 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn143
Fn144
Fn146
Fn147
Fn149
Fn150
Fn152
- 591 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn154
Fn155
Fn156
Fn157
Fn158
Fn159
Fn160 MSP07
#P
MSP06
#P
MSP05
#P
MSP04
#P
MSP03
#P
MSP02
#P
MSP01
#P
MSP00
#P
Fn161 MSP15
#P
MSP14
#P
MSP13
#P
MSP12
#P
MSP11
#P
MSP10
#P
MSP09
#P
MSP08
#P
Fn162
Fn163
Fn164
Fn165
Fn166
Fn167
Fn171 CSPENC#SP
Fn172 PBATL
#P
PBATZ
#P
Fn173
Fn174
- 592 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn176
Fn177
Fn178
Fn179
Fn181
Fn183
Fn185
Fn186
Fn187
Fn189
Fn191
Fn192
Fn193
Fn194
Fn195
Fn196
- 593 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn198
Fn199 MCHAO#P
Fn202 AR072
#SP
AR062
#SP
AR052
#SP
AR042
#SP
AR032
#SP
AR022
#SP
AR012
#SP
AR002
#SP
Fn203 AR152
#SP
AR142
#SP
AR132
#SP
AR122
#SP
AR112
#SP
AR102
#SP
AR092
#SP
AR082
#SP
Fn206 AR073
#SP
AR063
#SP
AR053
#SP
AR043
#SP
AR033
#SP
AR023
#SP
AR013
#SP
AR003
#SP
Fn207 AR153
#SP
AR143
#SP
AR133
#SP
AR123
#SP
AR113
#SP
AR103
#SP
AR093
#SP
AR083
#SP
Fn209
Fn212
Fn213
Fn214
Fn215
Fn216
Fn217
Fn218
- 594 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn264 SPWRN8
#P
SPWRN7
#P
SPWRN6
#P
SPWRN5
#P
SPWRN4
#P
SPWRN3
#P
SPWRN2
#P
SPWRN1
#P
Fn265 SPWRN9
#P
Fn269 CSPEND#SP
Fn272 AR074
#SP
AR064
#SP
AR054
#SP
AR044
#SP
AR034
#SP
AR024
#SP
AR014
#SP
AR004
#SP
Fn273 AR154
#SP
AR144
#SP
AR134
#SP
AR124
#SP
AR114
#SP
AR104
#SP
AR094
#SP
AR084
#SP
Fn275
Fn276 UO023
#P
UO022
#P
UO021
#P
UO020
#P
UO019
#P
UO018
#P
UO017
#P
UO016
#P
Fn277 UO031
#P
UO030
#P
UO029
#P
UO028
#P
UO027
#P
UO026
#P
UO025
#P
UO024
#P
Fn278
Fn279
Fn280 UO207
#P
UO206
#P
UO205
#P
UO204
#P
UO203
#P
UO202
#P
UO201
#P
UO200
#P
Fn281 UO215
#P
UO214
#P
UO213
#P
UO212
#P
UO211
#P
UO210
#P
UO209
#P
UO208
#P
Fn282 UO223
#P
UO222
#P
UO221
#P
UO220
#P
UO219
#P
UO218
#P
UO217
#P
UO216
#P
Fn283 UO231
#P
UO230
#P
UO229
#P
UO228
#P
UO227
#P
UO226
#P
UO225
#P
UO224
#P
Fn284 UO307
#P
UO306
#P
UO305
#P
UO304
#P
UO303
#P
UO302
#P
UO301
#P
UO300
#P
- 595 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn286 UO323
#P
UO322
#P
UO321
#P
UO320
#P
UO319
#P
UO318
#P
UO317
#P
UO316
#P
Fn287 UO331
#P
UO330
#P
UO329
#P
UO328
#P
UO327
#P
UO326
#P
UO325
#P
UO324
#P
Fn291
Fn292 ITED
Fn298
Fn299
Fn300
Fn301
Fn302
Fn303
Fn304
Fn305
Fn306
- 596 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn308
Fn309
Fn310
Fn311
Fn312
Fn313
Fn314
Fn316
Fn317
Fn318
Fn319
Fn320
Fn321
Fn322
Fn323
Fn324
Fn325
Fn326
Fn327
- 597 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn330
Fn331
Fn332
Fn333
Fn334
Fn335
Fn336
Fn337
Fn338
Fn339
Fn340
Fn347
Fn348
Fn349
Fn350
- 598 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
Fn395
Fn396
Fn397
Fn398
Fn399
Fn403 SYNER
#P
Fn404 COSP4
#P
COSP3
#P
Fn405
Fn406
Fn407
Fn408
Fn409
Fn410
Fn411
Fn412
Fn413
Fn414
- 599 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
Fn416
Fn417
Fn418
to
Fn511
Fn514 MCEX8
#P
MCEX7
#P
MCEX6
#P
MCEX5
#P
MCEX4
#P
MCEX3
#P
MCEX2
#P
MCEX1
#P
Fn519
Fn520 ACDEC
#P ATBK
to
Fn531 MMDISL
Fn533
to
Fn767
- 600 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 601 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the
first time, set an IP address and other items carefully
as instructed by the network administrator, then
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting
may cause a communication failure on the entire
network.
2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network
can increase the communication processing load on
the CNC even if the unit is not communicating with
the CNC.
Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide
network. Use a router or the like to separate the
network including the CNC from the other networks.
NOTE
1 The embedded Ethernet port of FANUC Series
32i-A is available as an option.
2 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by
FANUC. General Ethernet cards available on the
market cannot be used.
3 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC
LADDER-III or SERVO GUIDE.
4 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary
communication as described above. Avoid using
the card for continuous communication.
5 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a
memory card slot, with a part of the card left
uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet
card, take great care not to damage the card by
hitting the protruding part of the card.
When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the
card immediately, in order to prevent any damage
to the card.
- 602 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Related NC parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 ETH
NOTE
This parameter is valid with series 656F and edition
06 or later.
NOTE
This parameter is valid with the
FS300is/310is/320is-A of stand-alone type, and
series 656F and edition 08 or later.
- 603 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
NOTE
1 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A of LCD-mounted
type is used and the PCMCIA Ethernet card is
selected for the embedded Ethernet function,
application software on Windows CE cannot use the
embedded Ethernet port. When the embedded
Ethernet port is selected for the embedded Ethernet
function, application software on Windows CE
cannot use the PCMCIA Ethernet card.
2 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A of stand-alone
type is used, the connection location of the
embedded Ethernet function varies according to the
setting of NC parameter No. 14896. So, the
restrictions below are applied to the Ethernet
interface on Windows CE.
(1) When 0 is set in NC parameter No. 14896 and
the PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected for the
embedded Ethernet function, application
software on Windows CE cannot use the
embedded Ethernet port.
(2) When 1 is set in NC parameter No. 14896,
application software on Windows CE can use
the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA
Ethernet card.
(3) When 2 is set in NC parameter No. 14896, the
restriction on item 1 above (for the
LCD-mounted type) is applied.
(4) When 3 is set in NC parameter No. 14896 and
the embedded Ethernet port is selected for the
embedded Ethernet function, application
software on Windows CE cannot use the
PCMCIA Ethernet card.
3 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A is used,
application software on Windows CE can perform
communication simultaneously on a port (embedded
Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card) selected for
the embedded Ethernet function.
- 604 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
1 When running user's original application software
created by using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function,
use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five
FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be connected to one
CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or
personal computers may overload the CNC,
reducing the communication speed.
- 605 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED
PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for
the PCMCIA Ethernet card are made when a
connection to SERVO GUIDE and FANUC
LADDER-III is established.
- 606 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Settings items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.
- 607 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
FOCAS2 screen
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the
(TCP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid input range is
5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
(UDP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
NOTE
1 When a connection to the CIMPLICITY i CELL is
established, set the UDP port number and time
interval above as described in the FANUC
CIMPLICITY i CELL Operator's Manual (B-75074).
2 The unit of the time interval is 10 ms. The allowable
range is between 10 and 65535. A time interval
less than 100ms cannot be set.
3 Decreasing the time interval setting increases the
communication load and can affect the network
performance.
Example) If the interval is set to 100 (100 x 10 ms
= 1 second), broadcast data is sent
every 1 second.
- 608 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
TCP port number 8193 8193 setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0
PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is
Default gateway None used for setting.
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100
The arguments of the data window library
NC TCP port 8193
function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for
number
setting.
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101
NC TCP port 8193
number
- 609 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the
embedded Ethernet port.
2 The number of FTP communications to which one
CNC can be connected using the FTP file transfer
function is one.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the
PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up. However,
the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is
not necessary usually.
- 610 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.
- 611 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
FTP transfer screen (1st page) FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file
transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that "21"
is to be specified usually.
USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the
host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the
host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be
specified.)
If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the
host computer becomes the log-in folder.
- 612 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Operation
Select a destination.
1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT]
to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys
[CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
- 613 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an
FTP server presence check based on PING is:
0: Made
1: Not made
NOTE
Usually, set this parameter to 0 (to make a check).
If this parameter is set to 1 (not to make an FTP
server presence check based on PING), several
tens of seconds may be required until an error is
recognized when no FTP server is present on the
network.
Mainly for security, a personal computer may be
set to ignore the PING command. When
communicating with such a personal computer, set
this parameter to 1 (not to make an FTP server
presence check based on PING).
- 614 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None
Connection Port number 21 21 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
host 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 setting.
User name user user
Password user user
Login DIR None None The parameter screen is used for setting.
NC parameter No. 20 9 9
- 615 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS function, with reference to "Related NC
Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working
(hereafter referred to as a DNS server), reboot the CNC, then
press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order.
The COMMON screen (DETAIL) appears.
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS
IP address field.
- 616 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
ADDRESS 1, 2 The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP
addresses 1 and 2 in that order.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP function, with reference to "Related NC
Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working
(hereafter referred to as a DHCP server), reboot the CNC, then
press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order.
The COMMON screen appears.
5 If the DHCP function of the CNC has been enabled and if the
DHCP server is connected successfully, the DHCP server
automatically specifies the following items.
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is
displayed in each field.
6 If the DNS function has also been enabled and if the DHCP
server and the DNS server work together (if the DNS server
supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.
- 617 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host
name in the "NC-<MAC-address>" format.
- 618 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Check items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server is connected successfully,
SUBNET MASK the items obtained from the DHCP server are
ROUTER IP ADDRESS displayed.
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2 If the DHCP server cannot be connected,
DOMAIN "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC.
If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the
DHCP server notifies the DNS server of this host name.
If the host name is left blank, a host name is
automatically assigned in the "NC-<MAC-address>"
format.
Example of automatically assigned host name:
NC-080019000001
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of embedded Ethernet
- 619 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS D1E
#3 D1E With the embedded Ethernet port, when the DHCP function is used:
0: The default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function are
specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0
TIME INTERVAL 0
1: The default parameters for CIMPLICITY i CELL are specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 8192
TIME INTERVAL 50
#5 DNS With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
#6 DHC With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
- 620 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Software conditions
The software conditions for using the unsolicited messaging function
are indicated below.
- Communication software
Software Drawing number Series Edition
Ethernet communication management application
A02B-0303-J572#656F 656F 12 or later
software
Embedded Ethernet control software A02B-0303-J571#656E 656E 11 or later
- Graphic software
Software Drawing number Series Edition
Software for the 15" display unit graphic function A02B-0207-J595#60VB 60VB 1.8 or later
- 621 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
8.2.4.1 Overview
This subsection provides an overview of the unsolicited messaging
function and describes the execution procedure.
Application software
Inquiry
Response Application checks for
CNC/PMC data changes.
NC program or ladder
program checks for Application receives
Notification
CNC/PMC data notification from CNC.
changes.
NOTE
The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
- 622 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 623 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
1 Enable the unsolicited messaging function according to "Related
NC parameters" described later.
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous
menu key until the soft key is displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for
the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.
5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] then make settings on
each screen.
6 Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message
screen is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the
soft key [UNSOLI MSG] is displayed.) For details of the
Unsolicited Message screen, see Subsections starting with
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
- 624 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Settings items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.
NOTE
Set page 2 (DETAIL screen) of the COMMON
screen when using the DNS/DHCP function. For
details, see Subsection 8.2.3, "Setting Up the
DNS/DHCP Function".
- 625 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
When using the DNS function, press soft key [COMMON] then press
page key . The COMMON screen (DETAIL) is
displayed. Set the DNS IP address setting items.
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
ADDRESS 1, 2 The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP
addresses 1 and 2 in that order.
- 626 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
FOCAS2 screen
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the unsolicited
(TCP) messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function). The
valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER Set this item to 0 when it is used as the unsolicited
(UDP) messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function).
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the unsolicited
messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function).
- 627 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Setting items
Item Description
MODE Select a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging
function.
For the method of selection, see "Operation" described
later.
• When "CNC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the CNC screen.
In this case, setting on the personal computer is
disabled.
For details, see Subsection 8.2.4.4, "Setting on the
CNC screen".
• When "PC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the personal
computer.
In this case, setting on the CNC screen is disabled.
For details, see Subsection 8.2.4.5, "Setting on the
personal computer".
- 628 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
1 The mode is set to "PC MODE" at the time of initial
use.
2 The mode can be switched only in the "Not Ready"
state. For the "Not Ready" state, see "Display
items" provided later.
3 If the mode is switched from "CNC MODE" to "PC
MODE", all parameters set on the CNC screen are
cleared.
4 The mode can be switched on the available device
side only.
Operation
The mode can be switched as described below.
2 Press soft key [MODE]. Soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC
MODE] are displayed.
- 629 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Display items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the personal computer
currently connected.
(Example of display format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS Displays the current state.
The following five states are available:
<1> Not Ready
State where data is not transmitted even when a
request for data transmission is made from an NC
program or ladder program
<2> Ready
State where data is transmitted when a request for data
transmission is made from an NC program or ladder
program
<3> Sending...
State present from the acceptance of a request for data
transmission from an NC program or ladder program
until data transmission is completed
<4> Receiving...
State present from completion of data transmission
until response data is received
<5> Completed
State present from reception of response data until
response data processing is completed
[Supplement]
• Data transmission
Means unsolicited message transmission (CNC→PC).
• Response data
Means a response to an unsolicited message
(PC→CNC).
AVAILABLE Device where embedded Ethernet is currently enabled.
DEVICE The embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card is
displayed.
NOTE
1 To switch the state from "Not Ready" to "Ready”,
the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart needs to be
executed on the personal computer.
2 To switch the state from other than "Not Ready" to
“Not Ready”, the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
needs to be executed on the personal computer.
3 For the timing charts of the states, see Subsection
8.2.4.6, "Execution methods".
- 630 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
1 To enable the settings on the CNC screen and
perform unsolicited messaging, the procedure below
needs to be used.
(1) Set all setting items on the Unsolicited Message
screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press soft key
[APPLY].
(3) Start unsolicited messaging (execute the
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart) on the
personal computer.
2 Setting of the setting items on the Unsolicited
Message screen (CONNECT) and execution of the
soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) are possible only
in the "Not Ready" state. For the "Not Ready"
state, see "Display items" in Subsection 8.2.4.3,
"Mode selection".
3 On the setting screen on the unavailable device
side, the setting items can be set. However,
execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY])
is possible on the available device side only.
- 631 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] then open page 2 and page 3 with page
keys . The Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) is
displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME (IP ADDRESS) When the DNS function is disabled, specify the IP address of the
communication destination personal computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
When the DNS function is enabled, specify the host name of the
communication destination personal computer. (Up to 63 characters can be
specified.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")
PORT NUMBER Specify the TCP port number and UDP port number of the communication
destination personal computer.
Usually, specify "8196".
The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
RETRY COUNT Specify the number of retries to be made when there is no response to data
transmitted by the communication function.
The valid input range is 0 to 32767.
TIMEOUT Specify a time-out period (in sec) from the transmission of data by the
communication function until a response is made to the transmitted data.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in sec) of the alive signal to be transmitted while the
communication function is operating normally.
Specify a value not greater than the value of TIMEOUT.
The valid input range is 1 to 32767.
- 632 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Item Description
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a type of control parameter. When this parameter is set to 0, the
TYPE control parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1: PMC address (response notification method)
• When set to 2: PMC address (simplified method)
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable (simplified method)
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable (simplified method)
(Note) The RTM variable is a real-time custom macro variable.
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a control parameter for executing data transmission.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 1
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Two bytes starting at a specified address are allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 2
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Only a specified address (one byte) is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for control.
Only a volatile common variable may be specified as a custom macro
variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 4
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
Only a volatile RTM variable may be specified as a RTM variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER Specify the number of data items to be transmitted.
The valid input range is 1 to 3.
TRANSMISSION Specify each parameter for transmission data.
PARAMETER
(NO.1 to 3)
TYPE Specify a transmission data type. When this parameter is set to 0, the
transmission parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1 or 2: PMC address
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable
• When set to 5: Nonvolatile RTM variable
PMC ADDRESS or Specify the start of a transmission data area
MACRO NO. When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC address for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify a RTM variable number for transmission.
- 633 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Item Description
SIZE or NUMBER Specify the size of a transmission data area or the number of variables.
The maximum specifiable number of bytes is as follows:
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 1: 2890 bytes
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 2: 2874 bytes in total
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 3: 2858 bytes in total
When using macro variables (custom macro variables or RTM variables), use a
conversion rate of one variable for eight bytes.
When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC area size (bytes) for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify the number of custom macro variables for transmission.
When a macro variable number of 1000 or greater (system variable) is
used, this parameter can be set to 1 only.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify the number of RTM variables for transmission.
CAUTION
1 When setting a PMC address for control or a PMC address for transmission,
observe the following:
(1) When a multipath PMC is used, use the following input format:
<path-number>:<PMC-address>
When specifying the PMC address R0500 of the second PMC path, for
example, input "2:R500". When only the PMC address (R500) is input,
the specification of the first path (1:R0500) is assumed for processing.
When the key for ":" is unavailable, use the key for "/" or "EOB" instead.
(2) Ensure that a PMC address area for control never overlaps PMC areas
used by other functions (FL-net, PROFIBUS-DP, and DeviceNet).
2 When setting a macro variable for control or a macro variable for
transmission, observe the following:
(1) When a multipath CNC is used, use the following input format:
<path-number>:<variable-number>
When specifying variable number #100 of the second CNC path, for
example, input "2:100". When only the variable number (100) is input,
the specification of the first path (1:100) is assumed for processing.
When the key for ":" is unavailable, use the key for "/" or "EOB" instead.
(2) Ensure that a macro variable for control never be doubly specified as a
variable to be used for a purpose other than the unsolicited messaging
function.
- 634 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
1 Two methods are available for PMC address specification in CONTROL
PARAMETER TYPE: response notification method and simplified method.
For details of the methods, see Subsection 8.2.4.6, "Execution methods".
2 The valid setting range of PMC addresses depends on the usable PMC
memory type. For details, refer to "PMC Programming Manual
(B-63983EN)".
3 The valid setting ranges of custom macro variable numbers and RTM variable
numbers depend on the selected options. For details, refer to "User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-63944EN)".
4 Ensure that the setting of TRANSMISSION NUMBER matches the settings of
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3). If TRANSMISSION
NUMBER is set to 3, and an invalid value is specified in any of
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, for example, execution of
soft key [APPLY] results in an error.
Operation
The settings of all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen
(CONNECT) can be made effective as follows:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [APPLY] is displayed.
NOTE
1 To start unsolicited messaging, the FOCAS2
function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 needs to be executed
first then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart
needs to be executed.
2 The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 can be
executed only in the "Not Ready" state. For
details of the state, see "Display items" in
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
3 When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is
executed, the Unsolicited Message screen
(CONNECT) displays the settings made on the
personal computer.
- 635 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
NOTE
1 When a ladder program is used, the response
notification method and the simplified method are
available. A major difference is that the response
notification method sends RES_CODE to the ladder
program in response to data transmission but the
simplified method does not send a response.
To utilize a ladder program based on logic used
with the FS16i, for example, use the response
notification method. When RES_CODE is
unnecessary or a new ladder program is created,
the simplified method can be used.
2 RES_CODE is recorded on the Ethernet log screen
when a value other than 0x00 and 0x01 is detected.
3 For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5,
"Unsolicited Messaging Function", in "FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window
Library Operator's Manual".
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a
macro variable for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of a
macro variable to be transmitted cannot be
identified when viewed from the ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for
both of control and transmission.
- 636 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for
transmission, the ladder program sets this signal to 1. The message
is then transmitted to the personal computer.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Message response reception signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the reception of a response to an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] Upon reception of a message by the personal computer, a response to
the message is transmitted to the CNC (communication function).
When the CNC (communication function) receives the response, this
signal is set to 1. When this signal is set to 1, the ladder program
reads RES_CODE then clears REQ to 0. Next, the CNC
(communication function) clears RES_CODE to 0 then sets this signal
to 0.
COM <Rxxxx+1.6>
[Name] Message transmission start signal
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Posts the start of transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] When transmission of a message to the personal computer is started,
this signal is set to 1. Upon completion of message transmission, this
signal is set to 0.
- 637 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
NOTE
For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5,
"Unsolicited Messaging Function", in "FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window
Library Operator's Manual".
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the
response notification method is described below.
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after
reception of the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2
function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
(1) After checking that RES is set to 0, the ladder program prepares a
message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function sets COM
to 1 then transmits the message.
(3) Upon completion of message transmission, the communication
function sets COM to 0.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication
function sets RES_CODE then sets RES to 1.
(5) Because of RES set to 1, the ladder program reads RES_CODE
then sets REQ to 0.
(6) Because of REQ set to 0, the communication function clears
RES_CODE to 0.
(7) The communication function sets RES to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
- 638 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a
macro variable for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of a
macro variable to be transmitted cannot be
identified when viewed from the ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for
both of control and transmission.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx#7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for
transmission, the ladder program sets this signal to 1. The message
is then transmitted to the personal computer. Upon reception of a
response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
- 639 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the
simplified method is described below.
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after
reception of the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2
function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the ladder program prepares
a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits
the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission
processing.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication
function completes reception processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication
function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
NOTE
A combination of a macro variable for control and a
PMC address for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of
PMC data to be transmitted cannot be identified
when viewed from the NC program.
In the description below, a macro variable is used for
both of control and transmission.
- 640 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
REQ <#xxxx>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message in a macro variable for
transmission, the NC program sets this signal to 1. The message is
then transmitted to the personal computer. Upon reception of a
response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
NOTE
A REQ input/output value is a real number. So,
"0" means "0.0", and "1" means "1.0".
- 641 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
• Example
[Description]
An NC program on CNC path number 1 posts NC command
start date and time information as an unsolicited message to
the personal computer.
[Setting]
As a macro variable for control, volatile RTM variable
number #0 (REQ) is used. On the other hand, macro
variables for transmission are used for date and time
information managed inside the CNC (system variable
numbers #3011 and #3012).
[Example of NC program]
A RTM variable is executed in synchronism with the
immediately following NC command according to the RTM
variable specification. At this time, the operation timing
of the immediately following NC command is not affected.
So, the NC program indicated below posts NC command 2
start date and time information as an unsolicited message to
the personal computer.
- 642 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; (1)
NC program #RV[0]=1; ①
#RV[0]=1;
ZEND;
:
:
:
NC command 1
Macro call command
One machining NC command 2
cycle
:
:
:
NOTE
1 Note that if a custom macro is used as a macro for
control, the operation timing of an NC command is
affected. If the RTM variable in the example above
is replaced with a custom macro, for example, NC
command 2 becomes unexecutable unless the
macro variable for control is changed.
2 For details of custom macros and RTM variables,
refer to "User’s Manual (Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System) (B-63944EN)".
- 643 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
#4 UNM With the embedded Ethernet port, the unsolicited messaging function
is:
0: Not used
1: Used
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 UNS
#4 UNS When the embedded Ethernet port is used and termination of the
unsolicited messaging function is specified from other than the
connected unsolicited message server, the function:
0: Rejects termination.
1: Accepts termination.
After these parameters are modified, the power must be turned off
then back on or the embedded Ethernet function must be terminated
then restarted for the settings to become effective.
- 644 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft
key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCMCIA] switches between enabled
devices.
NOTE
1 Information on a switched device is stored in
nonvolatile memory.
On the next power-on, the device last selected can
be used as is.
2 When using the unsolicited messaging function,
note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not
Ready" state, regardless of the unsolicited
message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the
response notification method, RES and
RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder
program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the
simplified method, REQ is cleared.
- 645 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER]. The program folder screen appears. (If
the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key.)
- 646 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
When using the FTP file transfer function, check
that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port.
The two conditions below determine a connection
destination on the host file list screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded
Ethernet port. Make a selection in "DEVICE
SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) A host computer can be selected from
connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. Make a
selection according to the [HOST] soft key
described later.
5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can
be switched using the page keys .
Display item
AVAILABLE DEVICE
The currently selected device is displayed.
Check that the embedded Ethernet port is selected currently.
CONNECT HOST
Number of the currently connected host of the host computer
- 647 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of files in the current folder.
DEVICE
Current device. When the embedded Ethernet host file list is
selected, “EMB_ETHER” is displayed.
CURRENT FOLDER
Current work folder in the host computer
FILE LIST
Information of the files and folders in the host computer
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device to be selected from the program folder screen. To
select the embedded Ethernet host file list, press soft key [EMB
ETHER].
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new subfolder in the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches the current folder for a file.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the embedded Ethernet host file
list screen.
- 648 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Update the file list data or change the file list type.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the file list data.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display only file names.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display file attributes, sizes,
dates, and file names.
NOTE
The items displayed in the detailed list depend on
the FTP server setting on the host computer.
Moving a folder
Move a folder.
1 Select a folder you want to move using cursor keys and
CREATE FOLDER
DELETE
and .
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
- 649 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
and .
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
The selected file is highlighted.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each file you want to delete.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
- To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
- To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
SEARCH
HOST CHANGE
- 650 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft
key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[RSTART].
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet
communication and then restarts it.
NOTE
1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts
communication even when it is in progress.
2 This function makes a restart by software. An
actual restart may be impossible under some
conditions.
3 When using the unsolicited messaging function,
note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not
Ready" state, regardless of the unsolicited
message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the
response notification method, RES and
RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder
program.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the
simplified method, REQ is cleared.
- 651 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the embedded Ethernet is displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP
file transfer, press soft key [PING FTP1] Similarly, to send the
PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [PING
FTP2] or [PING FTP3], respectively.
- 652 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key
[PING]. The specified number of PING commands are sent to
the specified destination.
8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft
key [PING CANCEL].
- 653 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
- 654 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED
PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status of the
embedded Ethernet function to be displayed.
- 655 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
- 656 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
NOTE
If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA
SERVER ERROR” is issued during data transfer
using the embedded Ethernet function, check the
error details on the log screen of the embedded
Ethernet function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or
PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED LOG] or
[PCMCIA LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press
the continue key.)
LOG screen
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and
time when an error occurred are displayed at the right end of the line.
The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where
MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours,
mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds.
The date and time of the upper item shown above is March 11,
16:55:23.
- 657 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order.
The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the
embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the
embedded Ethernet function and the basic communication
function.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.
(4) Soft key [UNSOLT MSG]
Displays the log related to the unsolicited messaging function.
- 658 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
- 659 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
- 660 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
9 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of
digital servo and adjustment of reference position.
- 661 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
Parameter No.2000
Parameter No.2020
Parameter No.2001
Parameter No.1820
Parameter No.2084
Parameter No.2085
Parameter No.2022
Parameter No.2023
Parameter No.2024
Parameter No.1821
- 662 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
#0 PLC01 0: Values of parameters No.2023 and No.2024 are used as they are:
1: Values of parameters No.2023 and No.2024 are multiplied by 10.
#1 DGPRM 0: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
The value for an x varies depending on whether an option is provided
or not.
- 663 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
- 664 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
- 665 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90E0 90E0
specification
LiS 300A1/4 0441-B200 351 G G
LiS 600A1/4 0442-B200 353 G G
LiS 900A1/4 0443-B200 355 G G
LiS 1500B1/4 0444-B210 357 G G
LiS 3000B2/2 0445-B110 360 G G
LiS 3000B2/4 0445-B210 362 G G
LiS 4500B2/2 0446-B110 364 G G
LiS 6000B2/2 0447-B110 368 G G
LiS 6000B2/4 0447-B210 370 G G
LiS 7500B2/2 0448-B110 372 G G
LiS 7500B2/4 0448-B210 374 G G
LiS 9000B2/2 0449-B110 376 G G
LiS 9000B2/4 0449-B210 378 G G
LiS 3300C1/2 0451-B110 380 G G
LiS 9000C2/2 0454-B110 384 G G
LiS 11000C2/2 0455-B110 388 G G
LiS 15000C2/2 0456-B110 392 G G
LiS 15000C2/3 0456-B210 394 G G
LiS 10000C3/2 0457-B110 396 G G
LiS 17000C3/2 0459-B110 400 G G
Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
LiS 1500B1/4 0444-B210 358 G G
LiS 3000B2/2 0445-B110 361 G G
LiS 4500B2/2HV 0446-B010 363 G G
LiS 4500B2/2 0446-B110 365 G G
LiS 6000B2/2HV 0447-B010 367 G G
LiS 6000B2/2 0447-B110 369 G G
LiS 7500B2/2HV 0448-B010 371 G G
LiS 7500B2/2 0448-B110 373 G G
LiS 9000B2/2 0449-B110 377 G G
LiS 3300C1/2 0451-B110 381 G G
LiS 9000C2/2 0454-B110 385 G G
LiS 11000C2/2HV 0455-B010 387 G G
LiS 11000C2/2 0455-B110 389 G G
LiS 15000C2/3HV 0456-B010 391 G G
LiS 10000C3/2 0457-B110 397 G G
LiS 17000C3/2 0459-B110 401 G G
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
- 666 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
(4) CMR
Necessary position
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767) feedback pulses per
motor revolution (as irreducible
= fraction)
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) 1,000,000 (Note 2)
(Note 1)
NOTE
1 For both F⋅FG number and denominator, the
maximum setting value (after reduced) is 32767.
2 αi Pulsecoders assume one million pulses per
motor revolution, irrespective of resolution, for the
flexible feed gear setting.
3 If the calculation of the number of pulses required
per motor revolution involves p, such as when a
rack and pinion are used, assume π to be
approximately 355/113.
- 667 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
[Example]
If the machine is set to detection in 1,000 degree units with
a gear reduction ratio of 10:1 for the rotation axis, the table
rotates by 360/10 degrees each time the motor makes one
turn.
1000 position pulses are necessary for the table to rotate
through one degree.
The number of position pulses necessary for the motor to
make one turn is:
360/10 × 1000 = 36000 with reference counter =36000
F⋅FG numerator 36000 36
= =
F⋅FG denominator 1,000,000 1000
[Example]
To detect a distance of 1 µm using a 0.5 µm scale, set the
following:
Numerator of F⋅FG L/1 1
= =
Denominator of F⋅FG L/0.5 2
<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One 8 mm n = 1/m = 125 n = 2/m = 25
revolution of 10 mm n = 1/m = 100 n = 1/m = 10
motor 12 mm n = 3/m = 250 n = 3/m = 25
- 668 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Closed loop
Semi-closed
Serial linear Serial rotary
loop Parallel type
scale scale
Command unit (µm) 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1
Initial bit setting b0=0 b0=0 b0=0 b0=0
Number of speed pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192
Number of position pulses 12500(*1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 2)
Set 8192 as the number of speed pulses. For the linear motor, make
settings according to "Linear Motor Parameter Setting" in the αi series
parameter manual.
NOTE
1 Setting of the number of position pulses for the semi-closed loop
(indicated by (*1) in the above table)
Set 12500.
2 As the number of position pulses, set the number of pulses fed back
from a separate detector when the motor makes one revolution. (The
flexible feed gear has no relevance to the calculation of the number
of position pulses.)
Example 1:
When a ball screw (direct connection) with a 10-mm lead and a
separate detector with a resolution of 0.5 µm per pulse are used
When the motor makes one revolution, the following pulses are fed
back from the separate detector:
10/0.0005 = 20,000
Accordingly,
Number of position pulses = 20,000
Example 2:
When a serial rotary scale with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses per
revolution is used, the number of position feedback pulses is
exceptionally calculated by the following:
12500 × (deceleration ratio between the motor and table)
When the deceleration ratio between the motor and table is 10:1, for
example, the number of position pulses is:
12,500 × (1/10) = 1250
3 When the set number of position pulses is greater than 32767
With the conventional NC, bit 0 (high resolution bit) to be initially set
was changed according to the command unit as required. With the
Series 30i, there is no dependency between the command unit and
bit 0 to be initially set.
The conventional way of setting poses no problem, but the method
described below makes the setting much easier.
- 669 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
(Example of setting)
When a linear scale with a minimum resolution of 0.1 (m is used and
the travel distance per motor revolution is 16 mm:
Ns = (travel distance per motor revolution (mm))/(minimum resolution
of detector (mm))
= 16 mm/0.0001 mm = 160000 (>32767) = 10000 × 16
So, set the following:
A: 10000
B: 16
NOTE
If the detector of the motor is an αi pulse coder (the
number of speed pulses = 8192), select a power of
2 (such as 2, 4, 8, and so on) as a conversion
coefficient whenever possible. (The position gain
value used inside the software becomes more
accurate.)
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the motor and table is
not an integer when a rotation axis is used, a
reference counter capacity needs to be set so that
the point where reference counter = 0 (grid point)
always appears at the same position relative to the
table.
Example of setting)
αi Pulsecoder, semi-closed loop (1 µm detection)
Required number of
Lead of ball screw Reference Grid width
position pulses
(mm/revolution) counter (mm)
(pulses/revolution)
10 10000 10000 10
20 20000 20000 20
30 30000 30000 30
- 670 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Example of setting)
System with detection unit = 1 µm, ball screw lead = 20
mm/revolution, and deceleration ratio = 1/17
NOTE
The reference counter assumes only an integer. So,
if a fraction is set for a reference counter capacity,
the gap to the point where reference counter = 0 is
compensated for.
(In pulse control theory, a position less than one
pulse cannot be controlled. So, grid interval
compensation is performed so that a grid point error
is less than one detection unit at all times.)
- 671 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
In addition to the parameters listed above, there are
parameters to be set using the detection unit.
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the separate detector
and table is not an integer when a rotation axis is
used, a reference counter capacity needs to be set
so that the point where reference counter = 0 (grid
point) always appears at the same position relative
to the table.
Example of setting)
Example 1)
When Z phase interval = 50 mm and detection unit = 1 µm
Reference counter = 50,000/1 = 50,000
Example 2)
When detection unit = 0.001° with a rotation axis
Reference counter = 360/0.001 = 360,000
Example 3)
When there is only one Z phase as in the case of a linear scale
Set a simple number such as 10000 and 50000 for the reference
counter.
- 672 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Display
The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axis
information. This information can also be specified by the operator.
The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMP
MAINTENANCE.
Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCE
screen to appear.
- 673 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
- 674 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
- 675 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
- 676 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
- 677 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
Setting
On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance
screen), pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:
To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop
state, position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be
input, then enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the
key on the MDI panel).
When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the
data is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an
entered value is incorrect, press soft key [READ].
When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters (No.
1023, 1905, 1936 to 1939, 14340 to 14375, or 14376 to 14407) and
displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB
setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the
parameter screen using the MDI or a G10
command. Use only the FSSB screen to enter
values for these parameters.
- 678 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
- 679 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
- 680 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
• TNDM
Enter odd and even numbers for axes for tandem control or
EGB. These numbers must be consecutive and within a
range between 1 and the number of controlled axes. If a
number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
warning message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is
displayed.
When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after
data entry, the warning message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE”
is displayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied.
• The setting disables the connection of controlled axes with
amplifiers and separate detector interface units.
• With an axis, a value other than 0 is set for two or more of
M1, M2, M3, and M3.
• A value other than 0 is specified for both CS and TNDM for
an axis.
• 1-DSP is 1 and TNDM is not 0 for an axis.
• 1-DSP is 3 and TNDM is specified for a multiple of four for
an axis.
• A duplicate value is specified for M1.
• A duplicate value is specified for M2.
• A duplicate value is specified for M3.
• A duplicate value is specified for M4.
• A duplicate value is specified for Cs.
• A duplicate value is specified for TNDM.
• An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TNDM.
- 681 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
<1> <9>
<2> <10>
<3> <11>
<4> <12>
<13>
<5> <14>
<6> <15>
<7> <16>
<8> <17>
<18>
- 682 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm 1 OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
Alarm 2 ALD EXP
Alarm 3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
Alarm 4 DTE CRC STB PRM
Alarm 5 OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
Alarm 6 SFA
Alarm 7 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
Alarm 8 DTE CRC STB SPD
Alarm 9 FSD SVE IDW NCE IFE
NOTE
The empty fields do not represent alarm codes.
NOTE
For the alarms with no action number, see the
maintenance manual of the servo amplifier.
- 683 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
If the emergency stop state is canceled when the
power line to the motor is disconnected, an
overcurrent alarm (software) may be issued. If this
poses a problem, set the following parameter to 1:
Bit 0 of parameter No. 2207: Ignores an overcurrent
alarm (software).
- 684 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a Pulsecoder failure. Replace the
Pulsecoder.
Alarm 7
Description Action
OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
1 Soft phase alarm 2
1 Pulse error alarm
1 Battery voltage zero 1
1 Count error alarm 2
1 Phase alarm 2
Battery undervoltage
1 1
(warning)
1 LED error alarm
Separate detector overheat
1
alarm
CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a detector failure. Replace the
detector.
Alarm 4 Alarm 8
Description
DTE CRC STB PRM DTE CRC STB SPD
1
1 Serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1
1
1 Separate serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1
Action:
An error occurred in serial communication. Check if the cable is
connected correctly and also check if the cable is not
disconnected and broken. If a CRC or STB error occurs, the
cause may be noise. In this case, provide noise protection. If an
alarm is always issued after the power is turned on, the
Pulsecoder, amplifier control board (i series), or separate detector
interface unit (i series) may be faulty.
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 6
Description Action
OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA ALD EXP SFA
Hard disconnection
1 1 1 0 (separate A/B phase 1
disconnection)
Soft disconnection (closed
1 0 0 0 2
loop)
Soft disconnection (α
1 0 0 1 3
Pulsecoder)
Action 1:
This alarm is issued when a separate A/B phase scale is used.
Check if the A/B phase detector is connected correctly.
- 686 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the position feedback pulse change is
smaller than the velocity feedback pulse change. This means that
this alarm is not issued in a semi-closed loop. Check if the
separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly. If
the separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly,
such a situation that only the motor makes turns in the reverse
direction at the start of machine movement because of a large
backlash between the motor position and scale position is
considered to have occurred.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2003 TGAL
Standard setting 4: An alarm is issued when the motor makes a 1/8 revolution.
Increase the setting of this parameter.
Action 3:
This alarm is issued when synchronization between phase data
and absolute position data sent from the built-in Pulsecoder is
lost. While the power to the NC is turned off, unplug the
Pulsecoder cable, then plug the cable once again after about 10
minutes. If this alarm is still issued, replace the Pulsecoder.
Alarm 4
Description
DTER CRC STB PRM
Invalid parameter detected by the
1
servo software
When PRM = 0, read the bit value indicated by diagnosis 280, and
determine the cause according to the following:
Diagnosis 280#0 = 1: In parameter (No. 2020) used for motor module
specification, a value not within the specifiable range is specified.
Diagnosis 280#2 = 1: In parameter (No. 2023), an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
Diagnosis 280#3 = 1: In parameter (No. 2024), an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
- 687 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
9.3.8 Others
An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 5. The meaning of each
bit is indicated below.
Alarm 5
Description Action
OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
1 Feedback mismatch alarm 1
1 Semi-closed/closed loop excessive error alarm 2
1 Current offset error alarm 3
Action 1:
This alarm is issued when the move direction of the position
detector becomes opposite to the move direction of the speed
detector. Check the rotation direction of the separate detector. If
the rotation direction of the separate detector is opposite to the
rotation direction of the motor, take the following action:
For the A/B phase detector:
Exchange the connections of A and A with each other.
For the serial detector:
Reverse the signal direction setting of the separate detector.
Even with the A/B phase detector, the signal direction can be
reversed by setting the parameter below. (This method cannot be
used when absolute position communication is required.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2018 RVRSE
#0 RVRSE Whether to reverse the signal direction of the separate detector can be
set.
0: Does not reverse the signal direction of the separate detector.
1: Reverses the signal direction of the separate detector.
If there is a large twist between the motor and separate detector, this
alarm may be issued in abrupt acceleration/deceleration. In such a case,
change the detection level.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2201 RNLV
- 688 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the difference between the motor
position and separate detector position exceeds the
semi-closed/closed loop excessive error level. Check if the dual
position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly. If the
dual position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly,
increase the alarm level. If this alarm is still issued after changing
the level, check the connection direction of the scale.
Action 3:
The current offset value (equivalent to the current value during
an emergency stop) of the current detector becomes abnormally
high. If this alarm is still issued after the power is turned off then
back on, the current detector is considered to be faulty. When
using the αi series, replace the amplifier.
- 689 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
Overview
Speed
Time
*DECα
PCZ
Grid
10mm/rev
10000P
Error Proportion Speed
CMR M
counter gain loop
Command +
- ×4 (Serial)
Reference
F⋅FG PC
counter
GRID
- 690 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
NOTE
For setting the reference position without dogs,
only the grid shift function can be used.
(The reference position shift function cannot be
used.)
- 691 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APC APZ OPT
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power
must be turned off before operation is continued.
#1 OPTx Position detector
0: A separate pulse coder is not used.
1: A separate pulse coder is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale
with reference marks or a linear scale with an
absolute address zero point (full-closed system).
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment
is performed or after the absolute position detector is replaced, this
parameter must be set to 0, power must be turned off and on, then
manual reference position return must be performed. This completes
the positional correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1
automatically.
- 692 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
(Example)
(1µm)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
- 693 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return,
this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set
by MTB.
When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position
once set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is
replaced or absolute
position is lost, perform this setting.
Overview
Speed
Time
JOG
ZRN
+Jα
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZP α
Operation
<1> Move the tool along an axis for setting the reference position in
the reference position return direction in jog feed and position the
tool near the reference position.
<2> Select the manual reference position return mode and set the feed
axis and direction select signal (+ or – direction) for the axis for
setting the reference position to 1.
<3> The tool is positioned at the nearest grid (electric grid based on
the one-rotation signal of the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter
No. 1006 from the current position. This position is set as the
reference position.
<4> After the in-position status is confirmed, the reference position
return completion signal (ZP1) and reference position
establishment signal (ZRF1) are set to 1.
* After the reference position has been set, select the reference
position return mode (ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an
axis-and-direction- select signal, then the tool returns to the
reference position.
- 694 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
- 695 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
Overview
The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of the
following target alarms occurs.
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.
For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting
tools from the time a warning occurs by the time a servo alarm occurs.
Signal
Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <F093.4 to 7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo
amplifier.
[Output condition] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier
and their corresponding warning signals.
SVWRN1-4
(Warning)
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1
- 696 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Overview
In the αi servo system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Remark: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)
- Servo motor
- Pulsecoder
- Servo amplifier module
- Power supply module
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SVI IDW
- 697 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
2 Press the [SERVO INFO] soft key to display the screen as shown
below.
- 698 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates
the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to
update the registered data, as described in the
editing section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.
- 699 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
Screen operation
NOTE
For axes that are not used by the αi servo system,
ID information of connected units cannot be
obtained.
- 700 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
10 AC SPINDLE
This chapter outlines the serial interface spindle amplifiers and
explains related parameters.
- 701 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
S command M command
NC PMC
FIN
Motor speed
SOVx (Spindle override)
S SOR (Orientation)
(Parameters Nos. 3735 to
3752) 0
R01O to R12O
1
Orientation speed
(bit 1 (ESF) of parameter No.3705, R01I to R12I
parameter No.3732, and bit 5 0 1
(ORM) of parameter No.3706) SIND
*ESP, MRDY,
SFR, SRV, ORCM etc.
Communication cable
Serial spindle
Communication
amplifier
function
Spindle
Operator's panel motor PC
Load meter LM
Speedometer
Spindle
SM
- 702 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
4095 Max
Parameter
Gear 2 Gear 3 No.3736
Gear 1
Parameter
No.3735
0
S code
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter -1
(min )
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
Parameter
No.3752
Parameter
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
No.3751
Parameter
No.3735
0
S code
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter -1
(min )
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
10.1.1.3 T series
4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4
S code
-1
(min )
0
0
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743 No.3744
- 703 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS
#1 SPS 0: The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.
1: The spindle tuning screen is displayed.
(2) Press the function key to select the screen for setting
parameters and other data.
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning
screen appears.
- 704 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- Gear selection
The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1
- Spindle
Select a spindle for which data is to be set.
S11 : Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S12 : Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S21 : Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
S22 : Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
- 705 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
- Parameters
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Gear ratio (HIGH) 4056 4056
4216 4216
Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW) 4058 4058
4217 4217
Gear ratio (LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed (gear1) 3741 3741
Max. spindle speed (gear2) 3742 3742
Max. spindle speed (gear3) 3743 3743
Max. spindle speed (gear4) 3744 3744
Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196
Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None
- 706 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- Operation mode
1 : SPEED CONTROL
2 : SPINDLE ORIENTATION
3 : SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL
4 : RIGID TAPPING
5 : SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
6 : SP.POSITIONING CONTROL
- Gear selection
- Spindle
The descriptions of these two items are the same as those for the
spindle setting screen.
- Displayed parameters
The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle positioning Synchronization
Normal operation Orientation Rigid tapping Cs contour control
control control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/ ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference Shift spindle stop deceleration constant Shift reference Shift reference
position position (%) position position
Shift reference Shift reference
position position
- 707 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
- 708 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- 709 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
- Spindle alarm
1 : Motor overheat 51 : Converter DC link overvoltage 86 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
2 : Excessive speed deviation 52 : ITP signal error I undetected
3 : DC link fuse blown 53 : ITP signal error II 87 : Spindle sensor signal error
4 : Input fuse blown 54 : Overload current alarm 88 : Radiator cooling fan stopped
6 : Temperature sensor disconnection 55 : Power line switch state error 89 : SSM error
7 : Excessive speed 56 : Internal cooling fan stopped 110 : Error in communication between
9 : Main circuit overload 57 : Excessive converter deceleration amplifiers
11 : DC link overvoltage power 111 : Converter control power supply
12 : DC link overcurrent 58 : Converter main circuit overload undervoltage
13 : CPU internal data memory error 59 : Converter cooling fan stopped 112 : Excessive converter regenerative
15 : Output switch/spindle switch alarm 61 : Alarm of position feedback error power
16 : RAM error between semi-closed and closed 113 : Converter cooler radiation fan
18 : Sum check error modes stopped
19 : Excessive U phase current offset 65 : Travel distance error during magnetic 120 : Communication data alarm
20 : Excessive V phase current offset pole determination 121 : Communication data alarm
21 : Position sensor polarity setting error 66 : Error in communication between 122 : Communication data alarm
24 : Transfer data error/stop spindle amplifiers 123 : Spindle switch circuit error
27 : Position coder disconnection 67 : Reference position return command 124 : Invalid speed specified for learning
29 : Short-time overload error in FSC/EGB mode control
30 : Input section overcurrent 69 : Safety speed exceeded 125 : Invalid degree of dynamic
31 : Speed detection disconnection 70 : Axis data error characteristic compensation
32 : Transfer RAM error 71 : Safety parameter error element for learning control
33 : DC link charge error 72 : Motor speed found mismatching 126 : Spindle speed exceeded
34 : Parameter setting error 73 : Motor sensor disconnection 127 : Invalid learning cycle
36 : Error counter overflow 74 : CPU test alarm 128 : Excessive speed deviation alarm
37 : Speed detector setting error 75 : CRC test alarm on spindle synchronous control
41 : Position coder one-rotation signal 76 : Safety function unexecuted 129 : Excessive positional deviation
detection error 77 : Axis number found mismatching alarm on spindle synchronous
42 : Position coder one-rotation signal 78 : Safety parameter found mismatching control
undetected 79 : Initial test operation error 130 : Speed polarity error in torque
43 : Signal of the differential speed control 80 : Alarm in spindle amplifier tandem operation
position coder disconnected communication destination 135 : Safety speed zero monitoring error
46 : Threading position sensor 81 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal 136 : Safety speed zero monitoring
one-rotation signal detection error detection error mismatch
47 : Position coder signal error 82 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal 137 : Device communication error
49 : Overflow of converted motor speed for undetected
differential spindle speed control 83 : Motor sensor signal error
50 : Excessive speed command 84 : Spindle sensor disconnection
calculation value under spindle 85 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
synchronization detection error
- Operation
Following 6 modes are available:
a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour control
f. Spindle positioning control
- 710 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- Load meter
The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
Load meter data × Max. output value of load
Load meter [%] =
32767 meter (*)
(*) Parameter No. 4127: High-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4274: High-speed winding of subspindle
Parameter No. 4093: Low-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4279: Low-speed winding of subspindle
- 711 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
- Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4042 4208 4042 4208
Proportional gain (LOW) 4043 4209 4043 4209
Integral gain (HIGH) 4050 4050
4213 4213
Integral gain (LOW) 4051 4051
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237
Gain change upon
4064 4220 4064 4220
completion of orientation
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PC-type orientation stop
4031 4204 4031 4204
position
- 712 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- 713 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP
#7 LDSP The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0: Not set automatically.
(*)1: Set automatically.
- 714 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
4 Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.
- 715 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
Overview
The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the
warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing
cutting load from the time a warning occurs by the time an overheat
alarm occurs. In addition, diagnostic information also contains
warning numbers.
Signal
Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <F264#0 to #7, F265#0>
[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi
spindle amplifier.
[Output condition] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number
consisting of SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning
number of the αi spindle having the smallest axis number is output.
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.
Warning
Contents Details
number
56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output.
Since the spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output,
an alarm occurs.
88 Radiator cooling fan If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal
stopped is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at
this time, use the PMC to perform processing as
needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
04 Open-phase detected If an open-phase is detected in the main power
in the converter main supply, the warning signal is output. Since the
power supply spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute (for the αiPS) or about five
seconds (for the αiPSR) after the warning signal is
output, an alarm occurs.
58 Converter main circuit If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is
overloaded overloaded, the warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output,
an alarm occurs.
59 Converter cooling fan If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the
stopped warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues
to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform
processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output,
an alarm occurs.
- 716 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
Warning
Contents Details
number
113 Converter radiator If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops,
cooling fan stopped the warning signal is output. Since the spindle
continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to
perform processing as needed.
If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an
alarm occurs.
01 Motor overheat When the motor temperature increases beyond the
overheat warning detection level (set by a
parameter), a warning signal is output. At this time,
spindle operation is continued. So, perform
necessary processing with the PMC.
An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has
reached the overheat alarm detection level.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
F265 SPWRN9
Diagnosis screen
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic
screen.
- 717 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
Overview
In the αi spindle system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
• Spindle amplifier (SP)
• Power Supply (PS)
ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units
during first startup of the CNC and then recorded. During second or
later startup, the ID information recorded during first startup can be
compared with the ID information read this time on the screen to
check whether the configuration of the connected units is changed. (If
there is a difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID
information of an unit that does not have ID information can be
displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference
between these IDs appears.)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SPI IDW
- 718 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
- 719 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates
the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to
update the registered data, as described in the
editing section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.
- 720 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
and .
- 721 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The ID information of the spindle motor is not
displayed automatically. To display the ID
information, enter it manually in the edit mode.
- 722 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.
- 723 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The mark ‘x’ represents a number.
- 725 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Points
(1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnosis function
(1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
DISPLAY for detail.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0008 *ESP
G0008 *ESP
*ESP : ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.
- 726 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT : EDIT (Memory edit) mode
(2) Check diagnosis functions 0000 and 1010 of the CNC. Check the
items for which 1 is displayed at right side.
- 727 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
- 728 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0044 MLK
- 729 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Points
(1) Check whether position display is operating.
(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic function.
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal
using the PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
+ J
1 : Feed along the 1st axis
:
8 : Feed along the 8th axis
+ : Feed in the + direction
- : Feed in the - direction
- 730 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Example)
In the normal state, pressing the "+X" button on the
operator's panel causes the signal +Jn to be displayed as "1".
* This signal becomes effective when the rise of the signal is
detected. If, therefore, the direction selection signal has
been entered before jog mode selection, axis movement is
not performed; set the bit "0" and then re-check the signal.
(3) Check diagnosis functions 0000 and 1010 of the CNC. Check the
items for which 1 is displayed at right side.
- 731 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.
- 732 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
JRV Jog feed and incremental feed are :
0 : Of feed per minute
1 : Of feed per revolution
(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated,
check the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the
cable between the position coder and the CNC if it is
short-circuited or ungrounded.
(6) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental
feed, and manual handle feed cannot be performed.
- 733 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Points
If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes
include the following:
• The servo is not activated.
• Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O
module.
• The I/O link of the I/O module is not allocated, or is not allocated
properly.
• A related input signal is not input due to a parameter setting error.
Also use CNC diagnosis functions to check the internal status.
HA3(05) HA3
HB3(06) HB3
Third
+5V(20) +5V
0V(16) 0V
- 734 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
+5V 0V HA HB
When rotated in the plus direction When rotated in the minus direction
1:1
+5V
HA On Off On Off
0V
+5V
HB On Off On Off
0V
1:1
1/4 1/4 (phase difference)
Check the on/off ratio and the phase difference between HA and HB.
- 735 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
(1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the screen.
When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual handle mode 1 0 0
G0412 HS5E
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator's panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.
- 736 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE
In the above table, n is the number of the manual
pulse generator (MPG) and up to 5 MPGs can be
used. A feed axis is selected by 4-bit code of A to E.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 MPX
#5 MPX In Manual handle feed mode, manual handle feed amount selection
signal is
0 : same for all manual pulse generator, and it is set by signals
MP1 and MP2<Gn019.4,.5>.
1 : differ to each other manual pulse generator, and it’s setting signal
as follow:
1st. Manual Pulse Generator : MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,.5>
2nd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP21,MP22<Gn087.0,.1>
3rd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP31,MP32<Gn087.3,.4>
4th. Manual Pulse Generator : MP41,MP42<Gn087.6,.7>
5th. Manual Pulse Generator : MP51,MP52<Gn380.0,.1>
- 737 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
(4) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental feed,
and manual handle feed cannot be performed.
- 738 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.
- 739 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Points
(1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator's
manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.
1 When cycle operation is not started (Cycle start LED does not light)
"****" is displayed at status display on screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
ST : Cycle start signal
- 740 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the state of this signal using the PMC's diagnosis function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
*SP : Feed hold signal
- 741 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
*AFVn : 2nd feed rate override
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
- 742 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
ITL 0: Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.
ITX 0: Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC's
signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *BSL *CSL *IT
*IT=0, *CSL=0, and *BSL=0 show that interlock
signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis's interlock
signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
DTCHn If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0: Not released
1: Released
(Equivalent to the control axis detachment signals DTCH1,
DTCH2, and so forth)
- 743 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR
When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified
speed.
* This function is valid when the parameter SAR (No.3708#0)=1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1
- 744 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display
on the screen (position screen).
(However, it is not displayed when parameter DPS (No.
3105#2) is set to 0).
Position coder
JA7B JYA3
SPM
JA7A Spindle motor
- 745 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Points
(1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator's panel.
(3) Confirm CNC's diagnosis function.
G0008 *ESP
*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :
- 746 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 747 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- LED display
Referring to Item, “LED display of main board” in Section 2.4, 3.4, or
4.4, check the LED on/off status of the main board.
If the motherboard has started up normally and the LED display
indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display
system, such as a cable not connected or a defective inverter board.
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure)
and the necessary software not installed.
- 748 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 749 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- PMC alarm
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
If "ER32 NO I/O DEVICE" is displayed on the alarm screen of the
PMC, no I/O devices are recognized.
- 750 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure
below.
- 751 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- Connection of cables
As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link cables are
used to connect JD1A (JD51A) and JD1B.
JD1A (JD51A) represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a
lower unit.
Check that the cables are connected correctly.
- 752 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1
- 753 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the
expansion unit.
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 18 pin and No.
50 pin of the expansion unit, DI and DO signals are not input and
output.
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 1 pin and No. 3
pin of the expansion unit, when DI signals are input and DO
signals are not output.
- 754 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
START
YES
Alarm SR0085?
NO NO
Is I/O parameter
correct?
OFF
Is power of I/O ?
ON
- Turn on I/O device
NO
Is cable connection
right?
YES
- Connect the cable
- I/O device is faulty
- Mother board or serial
communication board
Alarm SR0087? is faulty
Causes
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) Mother board or serial communication board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
- 755 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Countermeasures
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters:
- Setting
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm SR0086 will generate.
- Parameter
Value of parameter 0020
0 1 2
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122
Baud rate 103 113 123
0135#3 - - -
Communication method
RS-232C
MOTHER BOARD
Connector
JD56A JD36A
NOTE
Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit
numbers.
Example) 0101#7: bit7 of parameter No. 0101.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
NFD 0: Feed is output before and after data in data output
(FANUC PPR)
1: Feed is not output (standard).
ASI 0: Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1: Data input code is ASCII.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
1: No. of stop bits is 2.
- 756 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 757 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- Connection
Main board
RS232C (JD56A)
Punch panel
RS232C (JD36A)
Such as I/O device
- Cable connection
RS232C (JD56A)
(JD36A)
Punch panel
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
Connector : Half-pitch Connector :DBM-25S
G G
20-pins (PCR)
- 758 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
Reference position return was executed when the following condition
is not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis
is moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed
equivalent to 128 pulses of position error amount (DGN300).
Countermeasures
START
YES
128 or more (1) Next page
NO
- 759 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
(1)
NO
More than 4.75V
YES
CAUTION
(1) After the Pulsecoder or motor is exchanged,
reference position or machine's standard point may
be different from former one. Please set it correctly.
Reference
A speed more than 128 pulses is required because
if speed is lower that this, one-rotation signal does
not function stably, causing improper position
detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed
corresponding to a positional deviation of 1280
pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as
the minimum positional deviation with which
reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the
minimum positional deviation. If bit 0 of parameter
No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)
- 760 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Countermeasures
Machine position must be memorized using the following method:
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment
is performed or after the absolute position detector is replaced, this
parameter must be set to 0, power must be turned off and on, then
manual reference position return must be performed. This completes
the positional correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1
automatically.
- 761 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- VRDY
(Servo (Servo
amplifier) amplifier) Control
power
supply
Emergency stop
circuit
Serial spindle
3-phase AC
Circuit
breaker reactor
Single-
phase Circuit
breaker
- 762 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Check items
• Is the PSM control power supply on?
• Has an emergency stop been canceled?
• Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of
the terminating amplifier?
• Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to
the MCC contact of the PSM, check that sequence also.
• Is the power for driving MCC supplied?
• Is the breaker on?
• Has some alarm been issued in the PSM or SPM?
- 763 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- VRDY
- 764 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
Parameter No. 2020 : Motor format number
Parameter No. 2022 : Motor rotation direction
Parameter No. 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
Parameter No. 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
Parameter No. 1023 : Servo axis number
Parameter No. 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Parameter No. 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
- 765 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- Ambient temperature
A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the main board, and
causes this alarm to be issued if the ambient temperature is abnormally
high.
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control
unit so that the temperature falls within the proper temperature range
(0 to 58°C (for LCD-mounted type CNC) or 0 to 55°C (for
stand-alone type CNC)).
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the main
board may be defective.
- Fan motors
Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control
unit. Each fan motor is attached with an alarm detector circuit, which
notifies the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor,
thereby issuing this alarm.
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor according to "Replacing
the fan motor".
- 766 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- Replacing the axis control cards, optical cables, and servo amplifiers
Replace the axis control cards on the CNC.
Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB,
one at a time, to identify the defective item.
- 767 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- 768 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 769 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- 770 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 771 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
Number Contents
SP9001 to later: Spindle_n n-th spindle alarm (Spindle alarm display 01 or
larger)
- 772 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
11.25.1 Overview
The FANUC 30i series makes a transition to the special processing
state called the system alarm state when a state that disables the
continuation of normal system operation is detected.
When the system alarm state is entered, the CNC screen display is
switched and the following operations are performed:
• Servo and spindle amplifier excitation is turned off.
• Disconnection of I/O link communication
- Software causes
Mainly, the CNC system software detects software errors.
Typical causes are as follows:
• Conflict in processing/data detected by the internal state
monitoring software
• Access to outside of the valid data/instruction ranges
• Division by zero
• Stack overflow
• Stack underflow
• DRAM checksum error
- 773 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- Hardware causes
Mainly, hardware detects hardware errors.
Typical causes are as follows:
• Parity error (DRAM, SRAM, cache)
• Bus error
• Power supply alarm
• FSSB cable disconnection
- Others
Moreover, system alarms are caused by the following:
• Causes detected by peripheral software
Servo software (such as watchdog)
PMC software (such as an I/O link communication error)
- 774 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
,
Switches between pages.
Saved system alarm information can be output from the IPL screen to
the memory card. (This function is available only with the FANUC
Series 30i /31i /32i .)
- 775 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
For the FANUC Series 300i /310i /320i /300is /310is /320is, the
countermeasure depends on the control software version.
(A) For the following control software versions, use the SRAM batch
save function.
G001,G011,G021,G00A,G01A,G02A series
G002,G012,G022,G101,G111,G121,G131,G201 - Versions 01 to
22
G003,G013,G023,G103,G113,G123,G133,G203 - Versions 01 to
04
(B) In software versions other than those in (A), system alarm
information can be output from the IPL screen to the memory
card as in the FS 30i /31i /32i.
- 776 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 777 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- 778 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 779 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A problem occurred on a CNC bus.
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective or external noise may
affect the bus.
Countermeasures
Replace the displayed most possibly faulty component. In addition,
the main board, or “MASTER PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on
the system alarm screen may be defective.
This error may also be caused by external noise.
Check whether there is a noise origin around the machine and whether
the machine is grounded properly.
- 780 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A problem occurred on a CNC bus.
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective.
Countermeasures
Replace the displayed most possibly faulty component. In addition,
the main board, or “MASTER PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on
the system alarm screen may be defective.
- 781 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A problem occurred on a CNC bus.
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective or external noise may
affect the bus.
Countermeasures
Replace the displayed most possibly faulty component. In addition,
the main board, or “MASTER PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on
the system alarm screen may be defective.
This error may also be caused by external noise.
Check whether there is a noise origin around the machine and whether
the machine is grounded properly.
- 782 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Description
A fault occurred in the fan on the CNC control unit.
Causes
The fan may be defective.
Countermeasures
Replace the fan . See Section, “REPLACING FAN MOTORS” or
“REPLACING A FAN UNIT.”
- 783 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Data could not be transferred to the SRAM on the FROM/SRAM
module normally.
Causes
The module may be defective or the connector may not be connected
securely.
Countermeasures
Replace the FROM/SRAM module.
If the machine does not recover from the error after replacement,
replace the main board.
- 784 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Noise or an instantaneous power failure occurred in the CNC power
supply.
Causes
A power fault occurs.
Countermeasures
Find and remove the cause of the error.
This error may damage SRAM data.
- 785 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A fault occurred in the power supply on the main board.
Causes
The power supply module is defective.
Countermeasures
Replace the power supply module.
- 786 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
Causes
An alarm was detected on the FSSB.
NOTE
”/LINEx” following a message if displayed indicates
the number of an optical connector on an axis
control card.
LINE1 : COP10A-1 on the servo card
LINE2 : COP10A-2 on the servo card
LINE3 : COP10A-3 on the additional axis board
SYS_ALM114 FSSB DISCONNECTION 114: Communication between the axis control card and 1st
(MAIN -> AMP1) /LINEx servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM115 FSSB DISCONNECTION 115: Communication between the axis control card and 1st
(MAIN -> PULSE MODULE1) /LINEx separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM116 FSSB DISCONNECTION 116: Communication between the nth and mth servo
(AMPn -> AMPm) /LINEx amplifiers failed.
SYS_ALM117 FSSB DISCONNECTION 117: Communication between the nth servo amplifier and
(AMPn -> PULSE MODULEm) /LINEx mth separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM118 FSSB DISCONNECTION 118: Communication between the nth separate detector
(PULSE MODULEn -> AMPm) /LINEx interface unit and mth servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM119 FSSB DISCONNECTION 119: Communication between the 1st and 2nd separate
(PULSE MODULE1 -> PULSE MODULE2) /LINEx detector interface units failed.
SYS_ALM120 FSSB DISCONNECTION 120: Communication between the axis control card and 1st
(MAIN <- AMP1) /LINEx servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM121 FSSB DISCONNECTION 121: Communication between the axis control card and 1st
(MAIN <- PULSE MODULE1) /LINEx separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM122 FSSB DISCONNECTION 122: Communication between the nth and mth servo
(AMPn <- AMPm) /LINEx amplifiers failed.
SYS_ALM123 FSSB DISCONNECTION 123: Communication between the nth servo amplifier and
(AMPn <- PULSE MODULEm) /LINEx mth separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM124 FSSB DISCONNECTION 124: Communication between the nth separate detector
(PULSE MODULEn <- AMPm) /LINEx interface unit and mth servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM125 FSSB DISCONNECTION 125: Communication between the 1st and 2nd separate
(PULSE MODULE1 <- PULSE MODULE2) /LINEx detector interface units failed.
- 787 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
SYS_ALM129 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 129: A fault was detected in the power supply of the nth
(SERVO:AMPn) /LINEx servo amplifier.
SYS_ALM130 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 130: A fault was detected in the power supply of the nth
(SERVO:PULSE MODULEn) /LINEx separate detector interface unit.
- 788 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
….
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR:(406N-0010)
- 789 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
- 790 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
- 791 -
APPENDIX
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
A ALARM LIST
Appendix A, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following sections:
- 795 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 796 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 797 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 798 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 799 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 800 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 801 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 802 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 803 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 804 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 805 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 806 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 807 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 808 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 809 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 810 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
0345 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL Z AXIS A tool change position on the Z-axis is incorrect.
POS
0346 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL TOOL NUM A tool change position is not set.
0347 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL COMMAND Tool changing is commanded twice or more in the same block.
IN SAME BLK.
0348 TOOL CHANGE Z AXIS POS NOT A tool change spindle on the Z-axis is not set.
ESTABLISHED
0349 TOOL CHANGE SPINDLE NOT STOP A tool change spindle stop is not stopped.
0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal synchronization control axis number (parameter No.
THE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 8180) is set.
AXIS SET ERROR.
0351 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to synchronization control was
THE SYNC CONTROL IS CAN'T BE moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
USED. synchronization control by a synchronization control axis
selection signal.
0352 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform synchronization control for
the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further
great-grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
3) An attempt was made to operate synchronization control
although a parent-child-grandchild relation was not set.
0353 THE INSTRUCTION WAS DONE FOR This error occurred when:
THE AXIS WHICH WAS NOT ABLE - For synchronization
TO MOVE. 1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the slave axis.
- For composition
1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8162#7MUMx is set to 1.
0354 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the master axis
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN being parking during synchronization control, but an axis
SYNC MODE reference position is not set for the slave axis.
0355 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal composite control axis number (parameter No. 8183)
THE COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS is specified.
SET ERROR.
- 811 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 812 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 813 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 814 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 815 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 816 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 817 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 818 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 819 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 820 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 821 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 822 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 823 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 824 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 825 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 826 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 827 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 828 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 829 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 830 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 831 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 832 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 833 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 834 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 835 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 836 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 837 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 838 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 839 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 840 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 841 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 842 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 843 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
PW0007 X-ADDRESS(SKIP) IS NOT ASSIGNED The X address of PMC could not be assigned correctly.
Possible causes are:
- During the set of parameter No. 3012, the skip signal of the
X address was not assigned correctly.
- During the set of parameter No. 3019, the address other
than the skip signal of the X address was not assigned
correctly.
PW0008 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(DCS PMC) On the DCS PMC side:
- An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0009 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(PMC) On the PMC side:
- An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0010 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(DCS On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O
PMC) cross check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0011 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(PMC) On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0012 USER I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(DCS On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O
PMC) cross check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0013 USER I/O CROSS CHECK On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(PMC) check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0014 CPU TEST ALARM (CNC) An error occurred in a test of the CPU of the CNC.
PW0015 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that an error occurred in a safety
parameter for other than servo axes or spindle axes.
PW0016 RAM CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a RAM check of the CNC.
PW0017 INEXECUTION OF SAFETY The safety function was not executed normally in the CNC.
FUNCTIONS
PW0018 CRC CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a CRC check of the CNC.
- 844 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 845 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 846 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 847 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 848 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 849 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 850 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 851 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 852 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 853 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 854 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 855 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 856 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 857 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 858 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 859 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 860 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 861 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 862 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 863 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 864 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen
- 865 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen
- 866 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 867 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen
- 868 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 869 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 870 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 871 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 872 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
- 873 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 874 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
NOTE
*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the red LED is on, the SPM
indicates a 2-digit alarm number. When the yellow
LED is on, the SPM indicates an error number that
designates a sequence problem (for example,
when a rotation command is entered with the
emergency stop state not released).
See "Error Codes (Serial Spindle)."
*2 For information about serial spindle alarms for
numbers that are not listed below, refer to the
following documents according to the actual
spindle motor to be connected.
• FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-65285EN)
• Technical reports etc.
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9001 SSPA:01 MOTOR 01 1 Check and correct the The thermostat embedded in the motor
OVERHEAT peripheral temperature and winding operated.
load status. The internal temperature of the motor
2 If the cooling fan stops, exceeds the specified level.
replace it. The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling
component is abnormal.
SP9002 SSPA:02 EX 02 1 Check and correct the The motor speed cannot follow a
DEVIATION SPEED cutting conditions to specified speed.
decrease the load. An excessive motor load torque is
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. detected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
SP9003 SSPA:03 DC-LINK 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is
FUSE IS BROKEN 2 Check the motor insulation indicated), but the DC link voltage is
status. too low in the SPM.
3 Replace the interface cable. The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is
ground-fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
SP9004 SSPA:04 POWER 04 Check the state of the input The PSM found a missing power
SUPPLY ERROR power supply to the PSM. supply phase. (PSM alarm 5)
- 875 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9006 THERMAL SENSOR 06 1 Check and correct the The temperature sensor of the motor
DISCONNECT parameter. is disconnected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
SP9007 SSPA:07 OVER 07 Check for a sequence error. The motor speed has exceeded
SPEED (For example, check whether 115% of its rated speed. When the
spindle synchronization was spindle axis was in position control
specified when the spindle mode, positional deviations were
could not be turned.) accumulated excessively (SFR and
SRV were turned off during spindle
synchronization.)
SP9009 SSPA:09 09 1 Improve the heat sink Abnormal temperature rise of the
OVERHEAT MAIN cooling status. power transistor radiator
CIRCUIT 2 If the heat sink cooling fan
stops, replace the SPM unit.
SP9010 SSPA:10 LOW VOLT 09 1 Replace the cables. The control power voltage of the
INPUT POWER 2 Replace the spindle spindle amplifier is reduced.
amplifier control printed
circuit board.
SP9011 SSPA:11 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
OVERVOLT POWER 2 Check the input power the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
CIRCUIT voltage and change in power indication: 7)
during motor deceleration. PSM selection error. (The maximum
If the voltage exceeds 253 output specification of the PSM is
VAC (for the 200-V system) exceeded.)
or 530 VAC (for the 400-V
system), improve the power
supply impedance.
SP9012 SSPA:12 12 1 Check the motor insulation The motor output current is
OVERCURRENT status. abnormally high.
POWER CIRCUIT 2 Check the spindle A motor-specific parameter does not
parameters. match the motor model.
3 Replace the SPM unit. Poor motor insulation
SP9013 SSPA:13 CPU DATA 13 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
MEMORY FAULT printed circuit board. component is detected. (RAM within
the SPM is abnormal.)
SP9015 SSPA:15 SPINDLE 15 1 Check and correct the The switch sequence in spindle
SWITCHING FAULT ladder sequence. switch/output switch operation is
2 Replace the switching MC. abnormal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
SP9016 SSPA:16 RAM 16 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR printed circuit board. component is detected. (RAM for
external data is abnormal.)
SP9018 SSPA:18 18 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SUMCHECK printed circuit board. component is detected. (Program
ERROR PROGRAM ROM data is abnormal.)
ROM
SP9019 SSPA:19 EXCESS 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value for the U
U phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
- 876 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9020 SSPA:20 EXCESS 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value of the V
V phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
SP9021 POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY ERROR parameters. position sensor is wrong.
(No. 4000#0, 4001#4)
SP9024 SSPA:24 SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC-to-spindle The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER ERROR cable away from the power power-off or broken cable).
cable. An error is detected in
2 Replace the cable. communication data transferred to
the CNC.
SP9027 SSPA:27 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder
DISCONNECT 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor (connector JY4) signal is abnormal.
POSITION CODER signal. 2 The signal amplitude (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
SP9029 SSPA:29 29 Check and correct the load Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD status. continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in
the excitation state.)
SP9030 SSPA:30 30 Check and correct the power Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
OVERCURRENT supply voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
INPUT CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is
exceeded.)
SP9031 SSPA:31 MOTOR 31 1 Check and correct the load The motor cannot rotate at a
LOCK OR status. specified speed. (A level not
DISCONNECT 2 Replace the motor sensor exceeding the SST level for the
DETECTOR cable (JY2 or JY5). rotation command has existed
continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
SP9032 SSPA:32 SIC-LSI 32 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
RAM FAULT printed circuit board. component is detected. (The LSI
device for serial transfer is
abnormal.)
SP9033 SSPA:33 33 1 Check and correct the power Charging of direct current power
SHORTAGE supply voltage. supply voltage in the power circuit
POWER CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. section is insufficient when the
magnetic contractor in the amplifier
is turned on (such as open phase
and defective charging resistor).
- 877 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9034 SSPA:34 ILLEGAL 34 Correct a parameter value Parameter data exceeding the
PARAMETER according to the manual. allowable limit is set.
If the parameter number is
unknown, connect the spindle
check board, and check the
indicated parameter.
SP9036 SSPA:36 36 Check whether the position An error counter overflow occurred.
OVERFLOW gain value is too large, and
ERROR COUNTER correct the value.
SP9037 SSPA:37 ILLEGAL 37 Correct the value according to The setting of the parameter for the
SETTING the parameter manual. number of pulses in the speed
VELOCITY detector is incorrect.
DETECTOR
SP9041 SSPA:41 ILLEGAL 41 1 Check and correct the 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
1REV SIGN OF parameter. position coder (connector JY4) is
POSITION CODER 2 Replace the cable. abnormal.
3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor 2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
signal. Re-adjust the BZ JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
sensor signal. abnormal.
3 Parameter setting error
SP9042 SSPA:42 NO 1REV 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
SIGN OF POSITION 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor position coder (connector JY4) is
CODER signal. disconnected.
2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
disconnected.
SP9043 SSPA:43 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
DISCONNECT signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
POSITION CODER is abnormal.
DEF. SPEED
SP9047 SSPA:47 ILLEGAL 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the
SIGNAL OF 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor spindle position coder (connector
POSITION CODER signal. JY4) is abnormal.
3 Correct the cable layout 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
(vicinity of the power line). JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1-rotation signal is
incorrect (Pulse interval mismatch).
SP9049 SSPA:49 DEF. 49 Check whether the calculated In differential speed mode, the speed
SPEED IS OVER differential speed value of the other spindle converted to the
VALUE exceeds the maximum motor speed of the local spindle has
speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
differential speed is calculated by
multiplying the speed of the other
spindle by the gear ratio).
SP9050 SSPA:50 50 Check whether the calculated In spindle synchronization, the speed
SYNCRONOUS value exceeds the maximum command calculation value
VALUE IS OVER motor speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
SPEED motor speed is calculated by
multiplying the specified spindle
speed by the gear ratio).
- 878 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9051 SSPA:51 LOW VOLT 51 1 Check and correct the power Input voltage drop was detected. (PSM
POWER CIRCUIT supply voltage. alarm indication: 4) (Momentary power
2 Replace the MC. failure or poor MC contact)
SP9052 SSPA:52 ITP FAULT 52 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
1 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9053 SSPA:53 ITP FAULT 53 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
2 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9054 SSPA:54 54 Review the load state. An overload current was detected.
OVERCURRENT
SP9055 SSPA:55 ILLEGAL 55 1 Replace the magnetic The power line state signal of the
POWER LINE contactor. magnetic contactor for selecting a
2 Check and correct the spindle or output is abnormal.
sequence.
SP9056 COOLING FAN 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control
FAILURE circuit stopped.
SP9057 CONV. EX. 57 1 Decrease the An overload was detected in the
DECELERATION acceleration/deceleration regenerative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POW. duty. indication: 8)
2 Check the cooling condition Thermostat operation or short-time
(peripheral temperature). overload was detected.
3 If the cooling fan stops, The regenerative resistor was
replace the resistor. disconnected, or an abnormal
4 If the resistance is abnormal, resistance was detected.
replace the resistor.
SP9058 CNV. OVERLOAD 58 1 Check the PSM cooling The temperature of the radiator of
status. the PSM has increased abnormally.
2 Replace the PSM unit. (PSM alarm indication: 3)
SP9059 CNV. COOLING FAN 59 Replace the PSM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
FAILURE (PSM alarm indication: 2)
SP9061 SERIAL SPINDLE 61 Check parameter settings. The error between the semi-closed
ALARM and full-closed sides when the dual
position feedback function is used is
too large.
SP9065 SERIAL SPINDLE 65 1 Check parameter settings. The move distance is too long when
ALARM 2 Check sensor connections the magnetic pole is confirmed
and signals. (synchronization spindle)
3 Check power line
connections.
SP9066 COM. ERROR 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found in communication
BETWEEN SP 2 Check and correct the between amplifiers.
AMPS connection.
- 879 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9069 SAFETY SPEED 69 1 Check the specified speed. In the state in which safety speed
OVER 2 Check parameter settings. monitoring was enabled, the system
3 Check the sequence. detected that the motor speed
exceeded the safety speed or
detected an error during a free-run
stop.
SP9070 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA 70 1 Check connections (JA7A of An error was detected in an axis
the second spindle requires number check.
a dedicated connector).
2 Replace the SPM control
printed-circuit board.
SP9071 SAFETY 71 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in an axis
PARAMETER printed-circuit board. parameter check.
ERROR
SP9072 MISMATCH RESULT 72 1 Replace the SPM control A mismatch was detected between
OF MOTOR SPEED printed-circuit board. the safety speed check results of the
CHECK 2 Replace the spindle SPM and those of the CNC.
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9073 MOTOR SENSOR 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback signal is
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
3 Check and correct the
connection.
4 Adjust the sensor.
SP9074 CPU TEST ERROR 74 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in a CPU test.
printed-circuit board.
SP9075 CRC ERROR 75 Replace the spindle amplifier An error occurred in a spindle
control printed circuit board. amplifier CRC test.
SP9076 INEXECUTION OF 76 Replace the SPM control The SPM detected that safety
SAFETY printed-circuit board. functions were not executed.
FUNCTIONS
SP9077 MISMATCH RESULT 77 1 Replace the SPM control A mismatch was detected between
OF AXIS NUMBER printed-circuit board. the axis number check results of the
CHECK 2 Replace the spindle SPM and those of the CNC.
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9078 MISMATCH RESULT 78 1 Replace the SPM control A mismatch was detected between
OF SAFETY printed-circuit board. the safety parameter check results of
PARAMETER 2 Replace the spindle the SPM and those of CNC.
CHECK interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9079 INITIAL TEST 79 Replace the spindle amplifier An error was detected in a spindle
ERROR control printed circuit board. amplifier initial test.
SP9080 ALARM AT THE 80 Remove the cause of the During inter-SPM communication, an
OTHER SP AMP. alarm of the remote SPM. alarm was generated on the remote
SPM.
SP9081 1-ROT MOTOR 81 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
3 Adjust the sensor.
SP9082 NO 1-ROT MOTOR 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
- 880 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9083 MOTOR SENSOR 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. motor sensor feedback signal.
SP9084 SPNDL SENSOR 84 1 Replace the feedback cable. The spindle sensor feedback signal
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. is not present.
3 Check and correct the
connection.
4 Check and correct the
parameter.
5 Adjust the sensor.
SP9085 1-ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
3 Adjust the sensor.
SP9086 NO 1-ROT SPNDL 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SP9087 SPNDL SENSOR 87 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. spindle sensor feedback signal.
SP9088 COOLING RADI FAN 88 Replace the SPM external The external cooling fan stopped.
FAILURE cooling fan.
SP9089 COOLING RADI FAN 89 1 Check the connection Submodule SM (SSM) error
FAILURE between the SPM and the (synchronous spindle)
submodule SM (SSM).
2 Replace the submodule
SM(SSM).
3 Replace the SPM control
printed-circuit board.
SP9110 AMP b0 1 Replace the communication Communication error between
COMMUNICATION cable between amplifier and amplifier and module
ERROR module.
2 Replace the SPM or PSM
control printed circuit board.
SP9111 CONV. LOW VOLT b1 Replace the PSM control Low converter control power supply
CONTROL printed circuit board. voltage (PSM indication = 6)
SP9112 CONV. EX. b2 1 Check the regenerative Excessive converter regenerative
DISCHARGE POW. resistance. power (PSM indication = 8)
2 Check the motor selection.
3 Replace the PSM
SP9113 CONV. COOLING b3 Replace the cooling fan. Stopped cooling fan of the converter
FAN FAILURE radiator (PSM indication = A)
SP9120 COMMUNICATION C0 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.
- 881 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9121 COMMUNICATION C1 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.
SP9122 COMMUNICATION C2 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.
SP9123 SERIAL SPINDLE C3 Replace the submodule Submodule SW (SSW) error (spindle
ALARM SW(SSW). switching)
SP9135 SAFETY SPEED D5 Perform operation within the The motor position exceeded the
ZERO ERROR(SP) safety speed zero range. safety speed zero monitoring width.
SP9136 MISMATCH RESULT D6 Replace the spindle amplifier The spindle amplifier speed zero
OF SAFETY SPEED control printed circuit board. determination result did not match
ZERO CHECK(SP) the CNC speed zero determination
result.
- 882 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
NOTE
*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error
code is indicated with a 2-digit number. An error
code is indicated in the CNC diagnosis, No.712.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates the
number of an alarm generated in the serial spindle.
→ See “(9) Serial spindle alarms (SP alarm).”
SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
01 Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. For MRDY,
are two types of signals including the input signal and pay attention to the parameter setting regarding the
PSM contact signal) nor MRDY (machine ready use of the MRDY signal (parameter No. 4001#0).
signal) is input, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF
(reverse rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation
command) is input.
03 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings.
sensor is not used (position control not performed)
(bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of parameter No. 4002 = 0, 0, 0, 0), but
a Cs contour control command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
04 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings.
sensor is not used (position control not performed)
(bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of parameter No.4002 = 0, 0, 0, ), but
a servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, etc.)
or spindle synchronization command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
05 The orientation function option parameter is not Check the orientation function parameter settings.
specified, but ORCM (orientation command) is
input.
06 The output switching control function option Check the output switching control function
parameter is not specified, but low-speed parameter settings and the power line state check
characteristic winding is selected (RCH = 1). signal (RCH).
07 A Cs contour control command is input, but SFR Check the sequence.
(clockwise rotation command)/SRV
(counterclockwise rotation command) is not input.
08 A servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, Check the sequence.
etc.) control command is input, but SFR (clockwise
rotation command)/SRV (counterclockwise rotation
command) is not input.
09 A spindle synchronization command is input, but Check the sequence.
SFR (clockwise rotation command)/SRV
(counterclockwise rotation command) is not input.
- 883 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
10 A Cs contour control command is input, but another Do not switch to another mode during a Cs
mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or contour control command.
orientation) is specified. Before moving to another mode, cancel the Cs
contour control command.
11 A servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, Do not switch to another mode during a servo
etc.) command is input, but another mode (Cs mode command.
contour control, spindle synchronization, or Before moving to another mode, cancel the servo
orientation) is specified. mode command.
12 A spindle synchronization command is input, but Do not switch to another mode during a spindle
another mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or synchronization command.
orientation) is specified. Before moving to another mode, cancel the
spindle synchronization command.
14 Both SFR (clockwise rotation command) and SRV Issue either of them.
(counterclockwise rotation command) are input at
the same time.
17 The speed detector parameter settings (bits 2, 1, Check the parameter settings.
and 0 of parameter No. 4011) are not valid.
There is no corresponding speed detector.
18 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings and the input signal.
sensor is not used (position control not performed
(bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4002), but
position coder system orientation is issued.
24 If index is performed continuously in position coder Check INCMD (incremental command).
system orientation, an incremental operation is If an absolute position command is to follow, be
performed first (INCMD = 1), then an absolute sure to perform absolute position command
position command (INCMD = 0) is input. orientation first.
29 The parameter settings are such that the In the αi series spindle amplifier, the shortest-time
shortest-time orientation function is used (bit 6 of orientation function cannot be used. Use
parameter No. 4018 = 0, Nos. 4320 to 4323 ≠0). normal-system orientation.
31 The hardware configuration is such that the spindle Check the CNC model.
FAD function cannot be used.
In this case, the motor is not activated.
33 The hardware configuration is such that the spindle Check the CNC model.
EGB function cannot be used.
In this case, the motor is not activated.
34 Both the spindle FAD function and the spindle EGB The two functions cannot be used at the same
function are enabled. time. Enable either function only.
In this case, the motor is not activated.
34 The submodule SM (SSM) is faulty or the Submodule SM (SSM) error (synchronous
connection between SPM and SSM is in error. spindle)
- 884 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX B.LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
B
Fuse and fan
LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Ordering
Item Remarks
information
Fuse LCD-mo For i series control unit (7.2”/8.4”/10.4”) A02B-0236-K100
unted For i series control unit (15” ) A02B-0236-K101
type For is series control unit
Stand-al For control unit A02B-0265-K100
one type For i series display unit (10.4”) A02B-0303-K101
For i series display unit (15” ) A02B-0236-K100
For is series display unit
For PANEL i A08B-0084-K020
Others For operator’s panel I/O module A03B-0815-K001
For standard machine operator’s panel
For connector panel I/O module A03B-0815-K002
For operator’s panel connection unit A02B-0163-K111
For I/O Link-AS-i A03B-0815-K001
For terminal type I/O module A03B-0823-K001
Fan LCD-mo For basic unit (no-slot) A02B-0303-K120
motor unted For basic unit (one- or two-slot) A02B-0303-K121
type
Stand-al For basic unit (two-slot) A02B-0303-K120
one type For is series display unit
For basic unit (four-slot) A02B-0303-K122
For PANEL i (40-mm square) A08B-0084-K100
For PANEL i (60mm square) A08B-0084-K101
For PANEL i (for HDD unit) A08B-0084-K102
Others
Ordering
Item Remarks
information
Battery For LCD-mounted and stand-alone A02B-0200-K102
type control unit memory backup,
For PANEL i
For separate absolute pulse A06B-6050-K061
coder
Back light For 7.2” LCD A02B-0236-K112
Touch panel For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
protection sheet For 10.4” LCD (full-cover type) A02B-0303-K110
For 12.1” LCD A08B-0236-K118
For 15” LCD A08B-0082-K020
Pen for touch panel A02B-0236-K111
- 885 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
C BOOT SYSTEM
Appendix C, "BOOT SYSTEM", consists of the following sections:
- 886 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW
The boot system load the CNC system software (Flash ROM →
DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed.
The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
CAUTION
1 This control unit supports the use of a Memory card
as an input/output device. The Flash ATA card is
available:
See the order list for details of the supported Memory
card types.
2 On a Memory card, only those files that are in the
root directory can be accessed for display, reading,
and writing. Those in subdirectories cannot be used.
3 The time required to read or write each data item
varies depending on the Memory card type, the
status of use, and other factors.
4 For flash ATA cards, only those recommended by
FANUC are available.
5 When formatting a flash ATA card, use the quick
formatting method, which clears the file allocation
table and the directory information on the root
directory. An unformatted flash ATA card needs to
be formatted in FAT16 with a PC or the like. (A
FAT32-formatted ATA card cannot be recognized.)
- 887 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 888 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(2) When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start
the CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from Flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason,
a file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not in Flash
ROM or has been destroyed, the boot system is automatically
started.
System files
CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
User files
PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other
user-created files
- 889 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 890 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :
(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60W1 - 01 (1) Screen title. The series and edition of
the BOOT SYSTEM are displayed at
(2) 1.END the right end.
(3) 2.USER DATA LOADING (2) Function for terminating the boot
(4) 3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING system and starting the CNC.
(5) 4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK (3) Function for writing data to Flash
(6) 5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE ROM.
(7) 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE (4) Function for writing data to Flash
(8) 7.SRAM DATA BACKUP ROM.
(9) 8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT (5) Function for checking the edition of a
file in ROM.
(6) Function for deleting a file from Flash
*** MESSAGE *** ROM or Memory card.
(10) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (7) Function for making a backup copy of
the data stored on the Memory card.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] (8) Function for backing up and restoring
the SRAM area
(9) Function for formatting a Memory card.
(10) Simple operating instructions and error
messages are displayed.
Operating procedure
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function.
After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the
[SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, for a confirmation, it
maybe need to press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
Basic operation
Position the cursor. Select a function Check the selection
[ UP ] [SELECT] [ YES ]
[ DOWN ] [ NO ]
- 891 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Description
This screen is used to read a system or user file from a Memory card
into Flash ROM.
The USER DATA LOADING screen is used to load ROM data from a
Memory card to flash memory.
The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen is used to check the contents
of the ROM card installed in a Memory card and then load ROM data
from the Memory card to flash memory.
Screen configuration
Operating procedure
(1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the Memory card
and written to Flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
- A single page can list up to ten file names.
- If the Memory card contains ten or more files, the remaining
files are displayed on another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key.
The END option is displayed on the last page.
(2) When you select a file from the USER DATA LOADING screen,
you are prompted for confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)
1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
3 END
- 892 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
(3) When you select a file from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen, a ROM data confirmation screen is displayed for
confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK & DATA LOADING
G001A_B1.MEM
1 G001 001A
2 G001 021A
3 G001 041A
4 G001 061A
5 G001 081A
6 G001 0A1A
7 G001 0C1A
8 G001 0E1A
(4) To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the
[NO] key.
NOTE
The CNC option parameters corresponding to
"FANUC Remote Option System" are saved in the
option information file (file name: OPRM INF) in
FROM. If this file is rewritten, the option
parameters need to be certified because their
settings are changed.
- 893 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Description
This screen is used to list files in Flash ROM or Memory card,
together with the corresponding numbers of management units in each
file and the series and edition of the software.
Screen configuration
- 894 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.
(2) Select the file that you want to confirm (for example, "NC
BAS-1 (0008)").
(3) For the selected file, the management unit numbers are listed,
together with the series and editions of the management units.
After checking the listed data, select the [SELECT] soft key to
return to the file selection screen.
- 895 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Others (Parity information for the system file and user file)
The NC BAS-1, DGD0SRVO, and other system files in Flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name
field or parity field on the check screen contains a non-ASC II
character or an "@", the Flash ROM may have been destroyed or a
damaged file may have been read. Re-read the data from the Memory
card.
The PMC1, and other user files do not contain parity information in
each management unit. A non-ASCII character or an "@" may appear
in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not indicate that
the file has been damaged.
- 896 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
Description
This screen is used to delete a user file from Flash ROM or Memory
card.
Screen configuration
- 897 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.
(4) To start deleting, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the
[NO] key.
Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen)
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten
from the USER DATA LOADING / SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen.
- 898 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
Description
This screen is used to write a user file in Flash ROM to a Memory
card. Only user files can be saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card.
System files cannot be saved.
Screen configuration
Operating procedure
(1) Select the file you want to save.
(3) To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***
STORE TO MEMORY CARD
- 899 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen)
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against
free copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
Files saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card have the following
names :
- 900 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
Description
This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, tool
compensation memories, and other data, retained after the CNC power
in SRAM is turned off, to and from a Memory card.
Screen configuration
(4) SRAM FILE SIZE : 1MBYTE (4) The SRAM file size is displayed.
(Displayed after a processing option is
selected.)
(5) SRAMBAK.001 (5) The name of the file currently being
saved or loaded is displayed. (Displayed
*** MESSAGE *** after a processing option is selected.)
SET MEMORY CARD NO.001
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(2) If the data cannot be saved entirely onto a single Memory card, a
message such as that shown below is displayed. With the power
still on, insert the second Memory card and press the [YES] key.
Press the [NO] key to cancel saving.
(3) In this way, you can divide SRAM data onto a maximum of 999
Memory card for backup.
- 901 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
(2) A message such as that shown below is displayed. Insert the first
Memory card containing SRAMBACK.001 and press the [YES]
key. Press the [NO] key to cancel restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
SET MEMORY CARD INCLUDING SRAMBAK.001
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
(4) Replace the second card with another, if required. Repeat this
step until backing up all data.
- 902 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
CAUTION
1 Backup files will be created with a file name of
SRAMBAK.xxx, where xxx is replaced with a
number between 001 and 999 sequentially.
On the first Memory card, a backup file is created
with a name of SRAMBAK.001. If all data is not
contained on the single card, a backup file
containing the excess data is created with a name
of SRAMBAK.002 on the second Memory card.
In this way, you can divide data onto a maximum
of 999 Memory card for saving.
2 Check that the Memory card used for backup does
not contain a file with a name of SRAMBAK.xxx
before performing a BACKUP operation. You can
check a list of file names on a Memory card by
using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.
3 The Memory card used for backup needs to be
formatted in FAT16.
4 Depending on the boot software edition, the file
contents to be backed up and the file name differ:
- 60W1/06 edition or earlier
File contents: SRAM data
File name: SRAMBAK.xxx
- 60W1/07 edition or later
File contents: SRAM data, NC program (ATA
PROG in flash ROM)
File name: SRAM_BAK.xxx
Data previously backed up by an older edition of
boot software can be restored by a newer one.
- 903 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Description
This function is used to format a Memory card. Memory cards must be
formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can
be re-used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for
example, battery failure.
Operating procedure
(1) From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select
"8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT."
(5) When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
- 904 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
Description
The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the
CNC.
Operating procedure
From the MAIN MENU screen, select "1. END." The system displays
the "ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO" message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the MAIN MENU.
C.2.8 Cautions
CAUTION
Bear the following cautions in mind if using boot
software of the 60W1/06 edition or later:
- 905 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 906 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
- 907 -
D.MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
D.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................909
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) .............................910
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .........................................912
- 908 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX D.MEMORY CARD SLOT
D.1 OVERVIEW
Hardware
Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit
configuration
Type 1 Provided No card slot
Provided
Type 2 Provided (This slot, however, cannot
be used.)
Provided
Type 3 (when PANEL i is used) Provided
(See NOTE given below.)
(Supplementary)
- Types 1 to 3 indicate hardware configuration. See Section D.3.
NOTE
When the hardware configuration is type 3,
software write operation and other operations are
implemented by open CNC functions.
- 909 -
D.MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
Use memory cards that are recommended by or
purchased from FANUC.
Use of the compact flash card adapter in the card slot on the display unit side
When a compact flash card is inserted into a compact flash card
adapter (A02B-0303-K150) (referred to below as the CF adapter)
purchased from FANUC, and then the CF adapter is inserted into the
card slot on the display unit side, the compact flash card lock function
is available, the memory card interface cover can be closed with the
CF adapter inserted.
1. Insertion
- Set a compact flash card in the CF adapter
(A02B-0303-K150).
- Check that lock lever A is lifted, then insert the CF adapter
into the memory card interface.
- Lower lock lever A.
- Close the memory card interface cover.
NOTE
1 For continuous operation with a CF adapter
inserted, be sure to lower lock lever A and close
the memory card interface cover.
2 The lock function is enabled only when a CF
adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is used.
3 Insert a CF adapter so that the plane bearing the
label faces the screen.
2. Extraction
- Open the cover of the memory card interface.
- Push up lock lever A.
- Push eject button B once. The button protrudes.
- Push eject button B again. The CF adapter is ejected.
- Hold the CF adapter with fingers and pull it out.
- Close the memory card interface cover.
NOTE
When the lock lever is lowered (locked), the eject
button cannot be pushed.
- 910 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX D.MEMORY CARD SLOT
Lock lever A
Eject button B
- 911 -
D.MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Type 1
LCD-mounted type
Card slot on
display unit side
Control unit (LCD-mounted type)
Type 2
Stand-alone type (with an LCD unit)
Optical cable
Card slot on control
unit side
Card slot on
display unit side LCD unit for stand-alone type
Type 3
When the HSSB interface is used to connect the personal computer or
PANEL i
(Whe PANEL i is
used)
Card slot on display
unit side
Card slot on control
unit side
Optical cable
HSSB
board
Personal Computer or PANEL i
Control unit (stand-alone type)
- 912 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX E.LED DISPLAY
E LED DISPLAY
Appendix E, "LED DISPLAY", consists of the following sections:
E.1 OVERIVIEW............................................................................914
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ..............915
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)..................918
- 913 -
E.LED DISPLAY APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
E.1 OVERIVIEW
- 914 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX E.LED DISPLAY
CPU started up
(BOOT system)
Initialization of G/A
(BOOT system)
Task initialization
Title display
System ROM test
State where the CPU is not started after the power is turned
on
(BOOT system)
BOOT system ended, NC system started
(BOOT system)
FROM initialization
File cleared
Optional board waiting 1
- 915 -
E.LED DISPLAY APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Indicator initialization
(BOOT system)
FROM initialization
(BOOT system)
OPEN CNC BOOT (NCBOOT32) being executed
BOOT monitoring in progress
(BOOT system)
If processing stops during startup due to a CNC error, and the system
alarm screen is not displayed, take corrective action referring to Table
E.2 (b).
Table E.2 (b) Faulty Regions and Check Items If Processing Stops
during Startup
LED
Faulty region and check item
display
The power supply (24V) or the power module may be faulty.
- 916 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX E.LED DISPLAY
NOTE
Refer to Section 2.4 for LCD-mounted type
30i/31i/32i.
Refer to Section 3.4 for LCD-mounted type
300is/310is/320is.
Refer to Section 4.4 for stand-alone. (The name is
alarm LED "4".)
- 917 -
E.LED DISPLAY APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
LED Meaning
Display Action
ROM PARITY error
The SRAM/FROM module may be faulty.
An FROM file for program memory cannot be created.
The state of the file for program memory on the FROM is
checked with the BOOT system.
Rearrange the FROM.
Check the FROM size.
Software-detected system alarm
If it is generated during startup: Use BOOT to check the state
of the built-in software in FROM, and check the size of DRAM.
In other cases: Check the error on the alarm screen and take
corrective action.
The DRAM/SRAM/FROM ID is invalid.
(BOOT system, NC system)
The CPU card or the SRAM/FROM module may be faulty.
A servo CPU timeout occurred.
Check the state of servo software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
The servo card or the additional axis board may be faulty.
An error occurred when embedded software is incorporated.
Check the state of embedded software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
The indicator cannot be recognized.
The display may be faulty.
Hardware-detected system alarm
Check the error on the alarm screen and take corrective
action.
Software for optional boards could not be loaded.
Check the state of software for optional boards on the FROM
with the BOOT system.
An error occurred in waiting for an optional board.
The option board or the PMC module may be faulty.
The BOOT FROM was updated.
(BOOT system)
Turn on the power again.
DRAM test error
The CPU card may be faulty.
The ID of the indicator is invalid.
Check the indicator.
The ID of the BASIC system software does not math that of the
hardware.
Check the combination of the BASIC system software and the
hardware
- 918 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
F.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................920
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES .......................................922
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS .............................................924
F.3.1 BOOT Screen ...............................................................924
F.3.2 IPL Screen ....................................................................928
F.4 OTHER SCREENS ..................................................................929
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen.......................................................929
F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ..................930
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen...................................................931
- 919 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
F.1 OVERVIEW
NOTE
When the CNC is connected to the PC over
Ethernet, use the standard LCD/MDI for the
maintenance of the CNC.
- 920 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.
Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.
NOTE
Depending on when to tap, the popup menu may
not be displayed normally. If this occurs, repeat
tapping until it is displayed normally.
- 921 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
During maintenance
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
2. Display the boot screen.
3. Display the IPL screen.
4. Display the CNC power-on screen.
5. Start FOCAS2.
6. Start a registered application program.
7. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.
- 922 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
Rear view
Power supply
module
Rotary switch
Rotary switch
- 923 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
To open each screen of Ncboot32.exe, you are
recommended to use either the mouse or touch panel.
The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by using the
[Setting...] button.
Select the memory card on the CNC or a PC folder. The file location
may be changed at any time.
- 924 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
- 925 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
The CNC has the function of automatically saving the data of SRAM
in FROM (boot software version 60W1-07 and later). The PC can
restore the data that was saved automatically to SRAM. Press the
[AutoBackup...] button to display the following screen.
Select a saved image under "Name" and press the [Restore] button to
restore the SRAM data of the CNC.
- 926 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
- 927 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on
the CNC model. Follow the instructions displayed in
the menu.
- 928 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The
above screen is an example. The displayed information varies
depending on the system alarm issued in the CNC.)
- 929 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
The Series 300is/310is/320is does not provide a
status screen.
- 930 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
[Node] selects a node. In the list box in the center of the screen, the
programs registered for the selected node are displayed.
[New...] registers a new program. When a blank character is included
in the path, it is enclosed with double quotation marks.
[Remove] deletes a selected line.
[Edit] allows editing of a selected line. This button is used to edit
arguments. The character string %d in the command line is replaced
by a node number. To represent % itself, describe %%.
- 931 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
To set the display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next startup of
the CNC, select the "Boot Option" tab on the option setting screen.
- 932 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
NOTE
For any changes made on the option setting screen
of the Series 300is/310is/320is to take effect, you
must turn the power off and back on.
- 933 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 934 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
NOTE
Usually, the contents of the Registry are not
changed and, therefore, no problems will arise if
they are not automatically saved. You are
recommended to remove the check mark next to
Auto saving of Registry just in case.
[Battery life span] allows you to set the number of days after which a
message prompting you to save manually is to be displayed during
long-period operation.
[Battery alarm] indicates the state of the battery dedicated for backup
(in hexadecimal notation).
0000 : Normal
0001 : The previous auto saving not completed
Other : Battery hardware error value
- 935 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
The [New...] button is used to register a new file. Pressing the button
causes the following dialog box to appear, allowing you to specify a
file.
- Start screen
- Load/Save screen
NOTE
The name of a file mapping object is used
as a temporary file for use during saving
and restoration. You must, therefore,
specify a string characters effective as a
file name.
In the [Memory size] field, specify the size of the
memory mapped file. For a file on the Disk, you need not
specify the size because it is calculated from the actual
file name.
- 936 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
G MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE
TYPE UNIT
Appendix G, "MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT",
consists of the following sections:
- 937 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
G.1 OVERVIEW
Overview
The FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i of stand-alone type has a 7-segmentL
ED, rotary switch, and push switch.
When there is no MDI or MDI cannot be used due to a malfunction,
battery backed-up data can be saved or restored if the rotary switch
and push switch are operated.
NOTE
When MDI is available, use maintenance operation
of the BOOT function.
- 938 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
G.2 OPERATION
Function number
Each function is assigned a number. This number is called a function
number hereinafter in this manual. The function numbers that can be
selected with the rotary switch are listed below. Do not set the
reserved function numbers.
Function
Explanation
number
0 Normal state.
1 Set a display unit number in the Ethernet Display
function.
2 Set a node number in the Ethernet Display function.
3 Reserved
4 Checks settings in the Ethernet Display function.
5 Clears all data in memory.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Saves battery backed-up main board data in a memory
card at a time.
9 Reserved
A Restores battery backed-up main board data from a
memory card at a time.
B Reserved
C Reserved
D Reserved
E Does not wait for the display unit.
F Performs maintenance work.
- 939 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Function number 1
This function sets a display unit number in the Ethernet Display
function.
(1) Check that number 1 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(2) If the push switch is pressed, the 16 numbers from 0 to F are
displayed on the LED in sequence at one second intervals.
When the display unit number to be set is displayed on the LED,
press the push switch.
0 : Not used.
1 : The HSSB connection display unit or CNC-specific
display unit is set.
2 to 4 : Not used.
5 : The Ethernet connection display unit is set.
6 to F : Not used.
(3) The selected display unit number blinks on the LED. Press the
push switch again.
(4) The selected display unit number is displayed on the LED and
saved in the CNC.
Function number 2
This function sets a node number in the Ethernet Display function.
(1) Check that number 2 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(2) If the push switch is pressed, the 16 numbers from 0 to F are
displayed on the LED in sequence at one second intervals.
When the node number to be set is displayed on the LED, press
the push switch.
The node number ranges from 0 to 7.
(3) The selected node number blinks on the LED. Press the push
switch again.
(4) The node number is displayed on the LED and the display unit
number is saved in the CNC.
Function number 4
This function checks settings in the Ethernet Display function.
(1) Check that number 4 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(2) When the push switch is pressed, 0 and 1 are displayed on the
LED alternately at one second intervals. When 0 is displayed,
press the push switch.
(3) The selected number 0 blinks on the LED. Press the push
switch to stop blinking.
(4) The three numbers from 0 to 2 are displayed in sequence at one
second intervals again. When the number to be checked is
displayed on the LED, press the push switch.
0 : Not used.
1 : A display unit number is checked.
2 : A node number is checked.
- 940 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
(5) The selected number blinks. Press the push switch to stop
blinking.
Function number 5
This function clears all the battery backed-up SRAM data.
The settings of the Ethernet Display function are also cleared and the
display unit number and node number are set to 1 and 0, respectively.
(1) Check that number 5 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(2) Number 5 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) Display of the LED changes in the order: "-", "F", and "0".
(4) After all-clear operation terminates normally, the LED display
stops changing at number 0.
(5) Turn off the power, return the rotary switch to the original
position, and turn on the power again.
WARNING
1 This operation enables the CNC system to start up
solely (initial state). Accordingly, to recover
various functional operations, the cleared data
needs to be set again.
2 This operation can be performed by those
personnel who received the training of
maintenance and safety.
Function number 8
This function saves battery backed-up main board data in a memory
card at a time. The data saved using this function can be restored at a
time by performing the operation for function number A or by using
the SRAM DATA UTILITY function of the boot function.
(1) Inset a memory card with enough free space into the memory
card slot (MEMORY CARD CNM1B) of the main body.
(2) Check that number 8 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(3) Number 8 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(4) While data is saved in the memory card, display of the LED is
rotating clockwise.
(5) If the data cannot fit in one memory card, number 3 blinks.
Replace the memory card with another one, and press the push
switch.
(6) If the data cannot be written to the memory card, number 2
blinks on the LED. Replace the memory card with another one
and press the push switch.
(7) When the data has been saved normally, number 0 is displayed
on the LED. If the data cannot be saved normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
(8) If the data cannot be backed up because it is illegal, number 1
blinks on the LED. In this case, it is impossible to save the data
at a time. Back up individual data items one by one, then perform
all-clear operation.
- 941 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Function number A
This function restores battery backed-up main board data from a
memory card at a time.
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card slot (MEMORY
CARD CNM1B) of the control unit.
(2) Check that A blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) When letter A is displayed on the LED, press the push switch.
(4) While data is being restored from the memory card, the LED
indication turns counterclockwise.
(5) If the entire data cannot be restored from the single memory card,
number 3 blinks. Replace the memory card with the next memory
card, and press the push switch.
(6) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, number 2
blinks on the LED. Check the memory card status, and press the
push switch.
(7) When the data has been restored normally, number 0 is displayed
on the LED. If the data cannot be restored normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
Function number E
This setting does not wait for the display unit. Use this setting for a
configuration without a display unit.
- 942 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
H.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................944
H.2 EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION...................946
H.3 DISPLAY UNIT NUMBER SETTING AND
CONFIRMATION....................................................................949
H.3.1 Display Unit Number Setting...................................949
H.3.2 Display Unit Number Confirmation.........................950
H.4 NODE NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION ..........951
H.4.1 Method of Node Number Setting .............................951
H.4.2 Method of Node Number Confirmation...................952
H.5 CHANGING START SEQUENCES .......................................953
H.6 NCBOOT32E.exe.....................................................................954
H.6.1 Boot Screen ..............................................................956
H.6.2 File Storage Location Selection ...............................957
H.6.3 System Data Operation.............................................958
H.6.4 S-RAM Operation ....................................................959
H.6.5 File Operation...........................................................960
H.6.6 IPL Screen................................................................961
H.6.7 CNC Alarm Screen...................................................962
H.6.8 Status Screen ............................................................963
H.6.9 Option Setting Screen ..............................................964
H.6.10 Changer Screen ........................................................966
H.7 STARTING OF THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY
FUNCTION ..............................................................................967
- 943 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
H.1 OVERVIEW
Hub
ハブ
PANEL i Ethernet
M M M
- 944 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
NOTE
1 When using Ethernet Display function, note the following:
• The screen update interval of Ethernet Display function is longer than that of a
CNC-dedicated display unit. Even when a higher-performance personal
computer is used, the screen update interval cannot be made shorter than that
of a CNC-dedicated display unit.
• When high-load machining such as high-speed and high-precision machining is
performed, Ethernet Display function is more affected than a CNC-dedicated
display unit, so a longer screen update interval may result.
• As described in Appendix H.2, "EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION",
Ethernet Display function is designed for a system where multiple machines
share a display unit or a system that does not need a display unit usually. For
example, when using a machine that the machine operator operates by
displaying and operating the CNC screen at all times as in the case of using
MANUAL GUIDE i, use a CNC-dedicated display unit.
2 Only CNCs of stand-alone type can be used.
3 When Ethernet Display function is used, the PCMCIA Ethernet card cannot be
used. When using FANUC LADDER-III and SERVO GUIDE, use the embedded
port (Ethernet connector (CD38A) on the control unit).
4 Ethernet Display function cannot be operated with Fast Ethernet board.
5 When Ethernet Display function is used, the HSSB connection needs to be cleared
or the CNC-dedicated display unit needs to be disconnected. When a
CNC-dedicated display unit is to be connected, software for the graphic function
needs to be installed on the CNC.
6 For a personal computer (or PANEL i), select a CPU and memory size that can
sufficiently handle the connected CNCs and application software used. When
multiple CNCs are used, it is recommended to select Pentium III (866 MHz or
higher) for the CPU and a memory of 256 MB or more.
7 When PANEL i is used, the USB interface QWERTY MDI, FA full keyboard, or
general full keyboard is required. Refer to "FANUC PANEL i CONNECTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64223EN/02)".
8 When Ethernet Display function is used, the DHCP client function is automatically
disabled.
9 In a personal computer environment based on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or
later, a security warning screen as shown below is displayed when Ethernet
Display function is used for the first time. Select "Unblock".
- 945 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
CNCScrnE
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
M M M M M
E E E E E
M M M M M
JA JA JA JA JA
O O O O O
41 41 41 41 41
R R R R R
Y Y Y Y Y
C JA C JA C JA C JA C JA
A 41 A 41 A 41 A 41 A 41
E E E E E
T T T T T
H H H H H
E E E E E
R R R R R
C C C C C
O O O O O
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
LE LE LE LE LE
D D D D D
1 1 1 1 1
LE LE LE LE LE
D D D D D
2 2 2 2 2
S S S S S
WI WI WI WI WI
T T T T T
C C C C C
P P P P P
S S S S S
W W W W W
<CNC>
1. Control software for Ethernet Display function (series
656N/edition 01 or later)
2. Boot software (series 60W1/edition 13 or later)
3. Control software for Embedded Ethernet function (series
656E/edition 10 or later)
4. Communication management software (series 656F/edition 10 or
later)
5. Ethernet Display function (option)
6. CNC Screen Display function (option)
<Personal computer>
1. Disk for CNC Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later)
- 946 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
CNCScrnE
Notebook PC CNC
(192.168.1.200) (192.168.1.10)
<CNC>
1. Control software for Ethernet Display function (series
656N/edition 01 or later)
2. Boot software (series 60W1/edition 13 or later)
3. Control software for Embedded Ethernet function (series
656E/edition 10 or later)
4. Communication management software (series 656F/edition 10 or
later)
5. CNC Screen Display function (option)
NOTE
When a personal computer and CNC are connected
with each other on a one-to-one basis, the optional
Ethernet Display function may not be selected. In
this case, the node number is fixed at "0" (IP
address: 192.168.1.10).
<Personal computer>
1. Disk for CNC Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later)
- 947 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Operation monitor
Office
PC 3
(192.168.2.100)
CIMPLICITY iCELL
Hub 1 Hub 2
CNCScrnE ハブ 1 ハブ2
PC 1 PC 2
(192.168.1.200) (192.168.1.200)
Embedded Ethernet
NOTE
The basic network configuration based on Ethernet
Display function consists of only CNCs and a
personal computer for display. If the network has
a personal computer to which CNCs do not
communicate, CNC communication processing load
increases, and the display speed can slow down.
So, avoid connecting with the network at the whole
factory. However, when a personal computer is to
be connected temporarily for a purpose other than
display, the personal computer can be connected to
the network by satisfying the IP address system
above.
- 948 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
To use Ethernet Display function, set the display unit number to "5"
(Sets the display unit for Ethernet connection) with the rotary switch.
Set the rotary switch to "1" (Function number 1) then turn on the
power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to set the
display unit number.
Function number 1
(1) Check that "1" is blinking on the 7-segment LED then press the
push switch.
(2) Each of the sixteen numbers "0" to "F" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When "5" is
displayed, press the push switch.
(3) On the 7-segment LED, "5" blinks.
The display unit numbers are defined as follows:
0 : Not used
1 : Sets the display unit as a display unit connected to
: HSSB or a CNC-dedicated display unit.
2 to 4 : Not used
5 : Sets the display unit for Ethernet connection.
6 to F : Not used
(4) Press the push switch again. The blinking stops and the display
unit number "5" is saved to the CNC.
(5) Set the rotary switch to a proper position according to Appendix
H.5, "START SEQUENCE SWITCHING". Next, turn off the
CNC then turn on the CNC again.
CAUTION
Never turn off the power to the CNC until steps (1)
through (4) above for display unit number setting
are completed.
- 949 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Function number 4
(1) Check that "4" is blinking on the 7-segment LED then press the
push switch.
(2) Each of the two numbers "0" and "1" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When "0" is
displayed, press the push switch.
(3) On the 7-segment LED, "0" blinks.
(4) Press the push switch again. Each of the three numbers "0"
through "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED at intervals of
about one second. When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment LED,
press the push switch.
(5) On the 7-segment LED, "1" blinks.
(6) Press the push switch once more. The blinking stops and the
display unit number saved to the CNC is displayed. Check that
the display unit number "5" is set.
(7) Set the rotary switch to a proper position according to Appendix
H.5, "START SEQUENCE SWITCHING". Next, turn off the
CNC then turn on the CNC again.
NOTE
Upon completion of display unit number
confirmation, be sure to return the rotary switch to
the previous position.
- 950 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
Set the rotary switch to "2" (Function number 2) then turn on the
power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to set a node
number.
Function number 2
(1) Check that "2" is blinking on the 7-segment LED then press the
push switch.
(2) Each of the sixteen numbers "0" through "F" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When a node
number to be set is displayed on the 7-segment LED, press the
push switch.
NOTE
The numbers "0" through "F" are displayed. Note,
however, that a number within the range 0 to 7
needs to be selected.
CAUTION
Never turn off the power to the CNC until steps (1)
through (4) above for node number setting are
completed.
NOTE
Set a node number that does not duplicate the
node number of another CNC.
- 951 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Function number 4
(1) Check that "4" is blinking on the 7-segment LED then press the
push switch.
(2) Each of the two numbers "0" and "1" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When "0" is
displayed, press the push switch.
(3) On the 7-segment LED, "0" blinks.
(4) Press the push switch again. Each of the three numbers "0"
through "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED at intervals of
about one second. When "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED,
press the push switch.
(5) On the 7-segment LED, "2" blinks.
(6) Press the push switch once more. The blinking stops and the
node number saved to the CNC is displayed.
(7) Set the rotary switch to a proper position according to Appendix
H.5, "START SEQUENCE SWITCHING". Next, turn off the
CNC then turn on the CNC again.
NOTE
Upon completion of node number confirmation, be
sure to return the rotary switch to the previous
position.
- 952 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
NOTE
When the rotary switch is set to "0" or "F", the
CNC is not started until communication with the
personal computer is established.
- 953 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
H.6 NCBOOT32E.exe
NOTE
NCBOOT32E.exe is held on the Disk for CNC
Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later).
Set the rotary switch to "F" (Function number F) then start the CNC.
The boot screen and the IPL screen are displayed in this order.
With NCBOOT32E.exe, application software to be started after the
IPL screen is displayed can also be registered. Usually, CNC Screen
Display function (CNCScrnE.exe) is registered.
Double-clicking the icon on the system tray displays the status screen.
- 954 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
By left-clicking the icon on the system tray, the pop-up menu shown
below is displayed. Those CNCs that are not currently connected are
dimmed.
When a node number is selected from the pop-up menu, the current
screen (boot screen, IPL screen, CNC alarm screen, or screen of an
automatically started application) of the currently connected CNC can
be displayed in the forefront.
NOTE
To operate NCBOOT32E.exe, the use of a mouse
or a touch panel is recommended.
- 955 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
If the rotary switch on a CNC is set to "F" (Function number F), the
boot screen is displayed when communication between
NCBOOT32E.exe and the CNC is established.
When multiple CNCs are connected, multiple boot screens are
displayed.
- 956 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
Select the memory card of the CNC or a folder on the hard disk of the
personal computer.
The selection can be changed at any time.
- 957 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Select a file or files to be stored in the F-ROM of the CNC then click
the [Load] button. The selected file or files are written into the
F-ROM of the CNC.
Clicking the [Save] button saves system data selected from the
F-ROM of the CNC to a file.
Clicking the [Check] button checks selected system data and displays
check information.
Clicking the [Delete] button deletes selected system data from the
F-ROM of the CNC.
NOTE
Only user files holding ladder programs and so
forth can be operated as system data with the
[Save] button and [Delete] button.
- 958 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
This screen is used to operate data stored in the S-RAM of the CNC.
- 959 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
When the memory card is formatted, all data on the
memory card is erased.
- 960 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
Supplement)
If a CNC-dedicated display unit is connected, a function of
SYSTEM SERVICE MENU of the IPL screen can be operated
according to the corresponding MDI key operation performed at
CNC power-on time. If Ethernet Display function is used,
however, such MDI key operation is disabled. In this case,
select a desired function from SYSTEM SERVICE MENU on
the IPL screen.
(Tip)
SYSTEM SERVICE MENU items
MDI key operations on
corresponding to the operations listed in
CNC-dedicated display unit
right-hand column
at power-on time
0. END None
1. IPL MONITOR <-> + <.>
2. BACK-UP CNC DATA ALL CLEAR <DELETE> + <RESET>
3. LOCKED PROGRAM ALL CLEAR <M> + <0>
- 961 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
If a system alarm occurs due to a very serious fault
related to the memory, main CPU, or Embedded
Ethernet, the CNC system alarm screen might not
be displayed.
For details of CNC alarm screen operation and display, see Section
11.25, "SYSTEM ALARMS", and Section 11.26, "SYSTEM
ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O LINK".
- 962 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
- 963 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
When a node is selected from the [Node] list box, the name of the
application software registered for the node is displayed at the center
of the screen.
Clicking the [New...] button can register an application name. If the
path includes a blank character, enclose the path in double quotation
marks.
Clicking the [Remove] button deletes a selected application name.
Clicking the [Edit] button enables a selected application name to be
edited. When an argument is specified, the character string "%s" in
the command line is replaced with an IP address. To represent "%"
itself, code "%%".
Example)
To operate CNC Screen Display function, code an application
name as follows:
“C:\Program Files\CNCScreenE\CNCScrnE.exe” /H=%s:8193
- 964 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
- 965 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
NOTE
When you click the [No] button, the changer target
application is not started again. Even if the
changer target application is manually started later,
interaction with the changer screen is disabled.
If a registered application is not found, the dialog box "Node [xxx]:No
Application Program exists for this node." is displayed. ([xxx]
represents a node number.)
- 966 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
NOTE
To use CNC Screen Display function, its option is
required.
- 967 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
Related NC parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13114 P15
[Data type] Bit
P15 With CNC Screen Display function, the screen is displayed in:
1: 15-inch display unit mode
0: 10.4-inch display unit mode
NOTE
This parameter is effective when CNC Screen
Display function is used with the FS30i/31i/32i-A of
stand-alone type.
- 968 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX I.IPL MONITOR
I IPL MONITOR
Appendix I, "IPL MONITOR", consists of the following sections:
I.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................970
I.2 STARTING OF THE IPL MONITOR .....................................970
I.3 IPL MENU ...............................................................................971
- 969 -
I.IPL MONITOR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
I.1 OVERVIEW
WARNING
1 From the IPL monitor menu, do not select an item
other than the items listed below.
The other items represent functions for FANUC
service.
0. END IPL
3. CLEAR FILE
5. SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY
2 When an individual file is cleared, all data stored in
the file is cleared and initialized. So, before
clearing an individual file, back up the data of the file
as needed.
3 If a system label error has occurred, perform a clear
operation according to Appendix J, "MEMORY
CLEAR OPERATION", instead of clearing of an
individual file.
Open CNCs
<1> Start NCBOOT32.
<2> Select "1. IPL MONITOR" on the IPL screen.
<3> The IPL monitor screen is displayed.
For details, see Appendix F, "MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
(BOOT-UP AND IPL)".
- 970 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX I.IPL MONITOR
END IPL
This menu item ends the IPL monitor and starts the CNC.
CLEAR FILE
This menu item clears and initializes displayed individual files.
1 : All files except option parameter files
2 : CNC parameter files
3 : Tool compensation data
Tool compensation memory A, B, and C, tool nose radius
compensation data (including virtual tool tip direction),
Y-axis offset data, second geometric offset, and so forth
4 : Program storage files
A default folder definition file is included.
5 : PMC parameter files
7 : Custom macro files
Macro variables, macro variable names
8 : Macro executor files
P code variables
9 : Touch panel data files
NOTE
The displayed individual file items vary, depending
on the system configuration.
- 971 -
I.IPL MONITOR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 972 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX J.MEMORY CLEAR
J MEMORY CLEAR
Appendix J, "MEMORY CLEAR", consists of the following sections:
G.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................974
G.2 OPERATION METHOD..........................................................974
G.3 DATA TYPES TO BE CLEARED ..........................................976
- 973 -
J.MEMORY CLEAR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
J.1 OVERVIEW
1. Starting method
<1> For FS30i-A
When turning the power ON to the CNC, turn the power ON
while pressing the MID keys and at the same time
and holding them down. Keep holding them down until the
memory all clear approval screen is displayed.
- 974 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX J.MEMORY CLEAR
WARNING
1 When this operation is performed, the CNC system
enters a state (initial state) in which it can start up
by itself. To restore various function operations,
therefore, you must reconfigure cleared data.
2 This operation can be performed only by personnel
who have been trained in maintenance and safety.
- 975 -
J.MEMORY CLEAR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
- 976 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX J.MEMORY CLEAR
CAUTION
The types of data stored in SRAM/FROM differ
depending on the system configuration.
- 977 -
K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
CAUTION
1 Use the Default BIOS settings (state before
shipment from the factory) unless they present
problems.
FANUC does not conduct evaluation with BIOS
settings other than the Default ones. If changing
the BIOS settings for some reason or other,
therefore, you are required to perform sufficient
operation confirmation.
2 BIOS setup requires an input device. Get ready
either of the input devices below:
- PS/2 keyboard connected to the PS/2 port of this
device
- USB keyboard connected to the USB port of this
device
- Standard front panel of a device for automakers
The MDI unit and soft keys cannot be used with
BIOS setup. Connect a separate keyboard to this
device.
3 Use the setting of Quick Boot like Disabled.
- 978 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP
Starting setup
1. Terminate your work and save data.
2. Turn the power OFF, connect an input device such as a full
keyboard, and start up the system again.
3. While "Press <F2> to enter SETUP" appears at the bottom of the
screen, press the "F2" key, then BIOS setup starts and the menu
screen is displayed.
4. The menu screen is displayed. Change BIOS settings as
desired.
PhoenixBIOS 4.0 Release 6.0
Copyright 1985-2002 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All rights Reserved BIOS series/version
初期画面 (通常起動時)
Ending setup
Changes made with BIOS setup (including loaded default values) take
effect after you save the settings and restart the system. Use either of
the following methods to save the settings and restart the system.
(Method 1)
Press the ESC key or select the EXIT item with a cursor key,
then the EXIT selection screen is displayed.
Then, select "Exit Saving Changes" and press the Enter key.
(Method 2)
Press the F10 key and the message "Save Configuration changes
and exit now?" is displayed. Select "Yes".
To end setup without saving changes, use the following method:
Press the ESC key or select the EXIT item with a cursor key, then the
EXIT selection screen is displayed.
Then, select "Exit Discarding Changes" and press the Enter key.
- 979 -
K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
BIOS messages
When the power is turned ON, Power On Self Test is executed. If an
error is detected, any of the following BIOS message may be
displayed.
Message with a circle in the Solution required column
Some hardware error may have occurred. Solve the problem.
Message with a triangle in the Solution required column
This message may be displayed if battery supply is stopped, for
example. If it is displayed several times, some action is
required.
Error Solution
BIOS message Meaning
code required
○ CPU Temperature Exceeds The CPU temperature is too high. The radiator FIN may
the Upper Limit – FATAL not be in proper contact with the CPU.
○ Ambient Temperature Exceeds The ambient temperature is too high. The heat radiation of
the Upper Limit –FATAL (*1) the cabinet may not be performed correctly.
- 980 -
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
INDEX
ALARM SV5137
<Number>
(FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR) ..........................767
10.4" Display Unit for 2-Unit Display .......................... 273
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) .............767
10.4” Display Unit ........................................................ 259
Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors ....................683
15” Display Unit ........................................................... 265
Alarms Related to Disconnection..................................686
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)....... 918
Alarms Related to Serial Communication .....................686
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ... 915
Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and Separate Serial
<α > Pulsecoder .....................................................................685
αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ........................ 697 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit .............411
αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE .......................... 696 Attaching.......................................................................470
ATTACHING AND DETACHING LCD/MDI UNITS 469
<A>
AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP..................................482
AC SPINDLE................................................................ 701
AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ....740
Additional Axis Board .................................................. 379
Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters....................714
Additional Spindle Board.............................................. 381
Automatic start of trace setting .....................................541
Addresses ...................................................................... 510
ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG <B>
METHOD) .................................................................... 690 Backup Unit ..................................................................312
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF BACKUP UNIT ............................................................241
THE MONOCHROME LCD .......................................... 75 Basic Configuration of PMC .........................................489
ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE Basic Specifications ......................................................505
POSITION RETURN) .................................................. 761 Basic Unit......................................................................191
ALARM LIST............................................................... 795 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS ........464
ALARM LIST (CNC) ................................................... 796 Bode graph ....................................................................142
ALARM LIST (PMC)................................................... 853 Boot Screen ............................................................ 924,956
ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) ............................ 875 BOOT SYSTEM ...........................................................886
ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT).. 766
<C>
ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) ....... 766
Cabinet ..........................................................................453
ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION
Cable clamp and shield processing................................450
RETURN IS ABNORMAL) ......................................... 759
Cautions ........................................................................905
Alarm Related to Invalid Parameter Settings ................ 687
CAUTIONS IN REPLACING PCB’S ..........................471
ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER
Changer Screen .............................................................966
INTERFACE ALARM) ................................................ 755
CHANGING START SEQUENCES ..................... 922,953
ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ............................. 762
Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)........517
ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)............................... 764
Circle graph...................................................................124
ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS
CNC Alarm Screen................................................. 929,962
ABNORMAL)............................................................... 765
CNC Display Unit for Automotive Manufacturers .......277
ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) ........ 765
CNC STATE DISPLAY .................................................41
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED).... 765
Collective Monitor Function .................................. 558,559
ALARM SV5134
COLOR SETTING SCREEN..........................................68
(FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)............................ 767
Compensating the Touch Panel .............................. 243,373
ALARM SV5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) ................... 768
i-1
INDEX B-63945EN/03
<E> <I>
Editing Ladder Programs .............................................. 552 I/O .......................................................................... 195,330
i-2
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
i-3
INDEX B-63945EN/03
i-4
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
i-5
INDEX B-63945EN/03
<T>
T series .......................................................................... 703
Terminal Board Type I/O Module................................. 421
Terminal Type I/O Module Setting ............................... 435
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS........... 160,214,247
Tracing Data.................................................................... 60
Transition of the PMC Screens ..................................... 514
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 723
<U>
USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING
Screen............................................................................ 892
<W>
Warning Interface.......................................................... 716
WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION ... s-3
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS.............. s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT ........... s-5
Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information
Screen............................................................................ 155
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED
TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ....................................... s-7
Wave Display .................................................................. 89
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY.......................... 47
Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen ................................ 48
Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen .......................... 49
WHAT IS PMC? ........................................................... 489
<X>
XY graph....................................................................... 112
<Y>
Y-time graph ................................................................... 90
i-6
Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-63945EN)
Addition of functions
Addition of following models
02 Jun, 2004 - Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5
- Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A
- Series 32i /320i /320is-MODEL A
01 May, 2003
2. Summary of change
2. Summary of change
Correction
Another
CUST.
01 08.04.03 A. Koizumi New issue DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
(P.163)
2.4.1 Printed Circuit Boards for 7.2"/8.4"/10.4" Display Units
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
- Specification
Item Specification Remarks
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0020
(For Old TP)
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0028
(For New TP)
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (For 10.4"LCD)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0634
(For Old TP)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0630
(For New TP)
A20B-8101-0023 Old Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (For 12.1"LCD)
A20B-8101-0637 New specification
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0021
(For Old TP)
New Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0635
(For Old TP)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0631
(For New TP)
A20B-8101-0024 (For old TP)
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (For 10.4"LCD)
A20B-8101-0029 (For new TP)
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0025
A20B-8101-0370 Old Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (For 10.4"LCD)
A20B-8101-0700 New Specification
A20B-8101-0373 Old Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (For 12.1"LCD)
A20B-8101-0703 New Specification
A20B-8101-0371 Old Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (For 15"LCD)
A20B-8101-0701 New Specification
310is-A, 320is-A main board G4 (For 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0374
310is-A, 320is-A main board G6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0377
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0375
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01